JP7292601B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pinball game machine and a reel-type game machine.

In a pachinko machine, which is a representative game machine, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a specific game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a start winning slot provided on the game board. is performed, the display device provided in the game area starts to display the symbols in a variable manner. Then, when the internal lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops the combination of the specific symbols, notifies the player, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player. In the specific game state, for example, a variable winning device (so-called attacker) provided in the game area is controlled to a state in which balls can be entered, and a prize is awarded according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device (number of winnings). Ball payout is executed.

In such a game machine, generally, two types of jackpot probability are set, high probability and low probability, and as a result of a lottery based on winning, the value of the operation probability varies from low to high. There are models equipped with a so-called stochastic variation (hereinafter also simply referred to as “probability variation”) function ( see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-000369

However, conventional gaming machines have not been able to favorably enhance the amusement of the players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the interest of a player.

A game machine according to the present invention comprises a game board having a game area on which game balls roll, and whether or not a transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to a player occurs when the game ball passes through a specific area of the game area. A jackpot lottery means for performing the jackpot lottery, a variable state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is advantageous as a game state, and a lottery probability of the big win lottery means is higher than the variable state as a game state according to the result of the game . a game state control means for controlling a low normal state; a fall lottery means for performing a fall lottery in which the variable probability state is set to the normal state every time the big win lottery is performed; and a performance control means for executing a performance suggesting the result of the falling lottery at a predetermined timing, and the game state control means reaches a predetermined specified number of times after the jackpot game state ends. Until, the game state is shifted to a specific game state in which the variation time of the decorative symbol is shorter than usual, and the effect control means, after the number of times of variation in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, the specific A game machine characterized by executing an effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired in a game state, and executing an effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery during the effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired.

According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably enhance the interest of the player.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in an expanded manner; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in an expanded manner; FIG. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the front door frame of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a game machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the rear configuration of the game board of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a rear view showing a state in which the main control unit is removed from the game board of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 2 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a main controller unit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view showing the configuration of the back pack unit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a first monitoring device seen from the front of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the first monitoring device viewed from behind the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a game machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a plan view showing operation buttons of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of each counter used for the internal lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning/failing table storing values of random numbers for winning a jackpot in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the distribution table which memorize|stored the value of the random number which concerns on the allocation destination of the classification of the jackpot of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prize-winning process for the starting openings of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of game round control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation|variation start process of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display duration setting processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening-and-closing process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the front door frame opening monitoring process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of the game machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the data structure stored in the ROM of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the data structure stored in the ROM 412, and (b) is the data structure stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. It is a figure which shows. FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a register 952 included in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram for explaining a connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; 4 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment and the game state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment and the effects and the like; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion production|presentation processing (suggestion during time saving) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of result display processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when displaying a result) of the gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion production|presentation process (suggestion during the jackpot after time saving) of the gaming machine based on the modified example 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to modification 5 of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 9 is a series of diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a mode transition effect that is executed when a “best result” is obtained in the normal state of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect at the time of jackpot (opening and closing execution mode) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation type (production type) selection process of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart in another example of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; It is a figure explaining the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MA of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MB of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MC of the gaming machine based on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of another example of the abnormality notification process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning/failing table storing values of random numbers for winning a jackpot in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of variation start processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect|presentation process (suggestion at the time of a fall) of the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when displaying a result) of the gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion production|presentation process (suggestion during the jackpot after time saving) of the gaming machine which concerns on the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flow chart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the second embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit included in a sound output LSI of a game machine according to a modified example of the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic configuration diagram of a speaker unit and a cover member provided in a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment, (a) is a front view of a state in which the speaker unit is not covered by the cover member, and (b) is a front view of the speaker unit. FIG. 2C is a front view of a state covered by a cover member, FIG. 4C is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 4B, and FIG. 4D is a cross-sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. It is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a speaker unit and its peripheral structure provided in a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment, and (a) is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing a first state in which the speaker unit faces the front of the gaming machine; , (b) is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing the direction of the speaker portion changing from the front to the right side of the game machine, and (c) is a third view in which the speaker portion faces the right side of the game machine. It is a partially cross-sectional plan view showing two states. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine based on 5th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC and a speaker unit provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a conceptual diagram of temporal change in the reproduction volume of the speaker unit of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal time alerting|reporting process of the gaming machine based on 6th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of sound data reproduction processing of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the relationship between the production|presentation mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment, and volume setting. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of volume setting processing (step S4302 in FIG. 90) of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation mode determination process (FIG.90 S4303) of the gaming machine based on 7th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, each embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. As the gaming machine, a general pachinko machine will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, directions such as up, down, left, and right are specified based on the front view of the pachinko machine 10 unless otherwise specified. For example, the front side in FIG. 1 is the front side, and the back side is the rear side.

[First embodiment]
<Pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, a gaming machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine 10) according to the present embodiment includes a rectangular outer frame 11 forming an outer shell, and a game machine attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. and a game machine main body 12 which is attached.

The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that is open in the front and the rear and is installed in an installation frame (a so-called island facility) of amusement arcades in a vertical posture. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 (frame body) rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 toward the front side (player side), and a front side ( A front door frame 14 (frame body) rotatably supported toward the player side), and a back pack unit 15 (box-shaped body) rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 toward the rear side (far side from the player). and is locked by a locking device 131 (see FIG. 3). A prepaid card type ball lending device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided on the left side of the outer frame 11 .

The inner frame 13 is supported by one of the right side and the left side of the outer frame 11 with one of the right side and the left side as the supporting side. The front door frame 14 has one of the right and left sides of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 2 and 3) with one of the right side and the left side (the left side in FIGS. 2 and 3) as the support side. ). The back pack unit 15 is supported on one of the right and left sides of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 2 and 3) with one of the right and left sides as the supporting side. The locking device 131 has a cylinder lock 75 provided at the bottom of the right side or the left side of the gaming machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. and a function of making the front door frame 14 unopenable with respect to the inner frame 13 . In the pachinko machine 10, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 75 (see FIG. 7) and turned right, the function that prevents the inner frame 13 from being opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is released, and when turned left, the front door is opened. The function of making the frame 14 unopenable with respect to the inner frame 13 is released. Details of the locking device 131 will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the front side of the inner frame 13, and has an elliptical window portion 21 that opens in the thickness direction, and a see-through glass plate, synthetic resin material, or the like that is fitted in the window portion 21. and a window panel 22 formed by (see FIG. 2).

Further, the front door frame 14 includes an indicator lamp device 23A as light emitting means arranged on the right side of the window portion 21, an indicator lamp device 23B as light emitting means arranged on the left side of the window portion 21, An error display lamp portion 24 provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and disposed on the upper right side (speaker portion 26A), the upper left side (speaker portion 26B), and the lower left side (speaker portion 26C) of the gaming machine body 12. and speaker units 26A to 26C as audio output means and navigation means. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has three speaker units 26A to 26C, but it is sufficient to have one or more speaker units, for example, four or more. The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B have light emitting bodies (not shown) such as light bulbs in which light emitting elements such as LEDs (light emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements are enclosed in a spherical shell of glass, and when a big hit or a predetermined reach Lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the game state in the above. The error display lamp part 24 lights up when a predetermined error occurs. Also, the speaker units 26A to 26C can output voices, sound effects, and the like. Then, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are lit and blinked (luminous effect) in accordance with the pattern variation effect on the pattern display device 91, which will be described later, and voices and sound effects are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (audio effect). Thus, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the speaker units 26A to 26C are configured to function as effect executing means.

Further, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge forward (toward the player) on the lower side of the window portion 21 . The upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper bulging portion 31 has an upper plate 33 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a receiving plate for storing game balls. Further, the lower bulging portion 32 has a lower plate 34 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a receiving plate for storing game balls. The upper plate 33 has a bottom surface that gently slopes from the left side to the right side and is tapered toward the right side. (See FIG. 6).

When game balls become surplus in the upper tray 33, the game balls are discharged to the lower tray 34. - 特許庁That is, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 33 . In addition, the lower bulging portion 32 is provided with a lever that can be slid in the left-right direction. configured to be discharged from In this embodiment, the upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are formed integrally with the front door frame 14 at the lower position of the front door frame 14, and are adjusted to open and close the front door frame 14. The upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are also configured to open and close.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a shooting handle 41 as shooting means at the lower right position of the game machine main body 12 . The shooting handle 41 is biased counterclockwise (leftward), and when the player rotates the shooting handle 41 clockwise (rightward), the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is actuated. The game balls stored in the plate 33 are shot one by one toward the game area 104 of the game board 81 (see FIG. 7). In this embodiment, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). Further, in this embodiment, the number of game balls shot by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls per minute.

The shooting handle 41 is configured so that the game ball hitting force of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 changes according to the amount of rotation thereof, and as the player rotates the shooting handle 41 clockwise (right). The game ball hitting force of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 gradually increases, and as the player rotates the shooting handle 41 counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the game ball hitting force of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 gradually decreases. It is configured. That is, as the player rotates the shooting handle 41 clockwise (right), the reaching position of the game ball launched by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 on the game board 81 shifts from the left side to the right side.

Further, the shooting handle 41 is provided with a touch sensor 41a for detecting that the player is touching the handle and a shooting stop switch 41b for temporarily stopping the shooting of the game ball. A game ball is shot by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 when the touch sensor 41a is turned on by rotating the shooting handle 41 and the shooting stop switch 41b is off, and the touch sensor 41a is turned off or the shooting stop switch 41b is turned off. is on, the game ball is not shot.

Further, an operation button 35 as an operation means is provided on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31 . The operation button 35 is used for selecting the type of effect (type of effect), and the player can select the type of effect by operating the operation button 35 . As shown in FIG. 17, the operation buttons 35 include a decision button 35a arranged in the center, a left direction button 35b arranged on the left side of the decision button 35a, and a right direction button 35c arranged on the right side of the decision button 35a. and When selecting the type of effect, the player selects the type of effect by pressing the left button 35b and the right button 35c, and determines the type of effect by pressing the enter button 35a arranged in the center. be able to. Furthermore, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31, there is a ball lending button (not shown) for instructing the lending of game balls within the value balance (valuable balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit, and a CR unit. A return button (not shown) is provided for instructing return of the inserted card.

A passage forming unit 50 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 as shown in FIGS. The passage forming unit 50 is made of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper tray passage 51 leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage 52 leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 50, a receptacle portion 53 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 50, and the receptacle portion 53 is divided into left and right by a partition wall 54, thereby forming a front door side upper tray. A passage 51 and an entrance portion of a front door side lower tray passage 52 are formed. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage 51 and the front door side lower tray passage 52 communicates with a game ball distribution section 225 which will be described later, and the game balls entering the front door side upper tray passage 51 are guided to the upper tray 33, A game ball entering the front door side lower tray passage 52 is guided to the lower tray 34.例文帳に追加

Protruding shafts 61 and 62 are provided at the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 5) on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 . These projecting shafts 61 and 62 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 . Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook fittings 63 extending rearward are vertically arranged side by side on the front end side of the rotation on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (on the left side in FIG. 5). These hook fittings 63 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIG.
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 71 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . Support metal fittings 72 and 73 are attached to the upper end and lower end of the front surface of the resin base 71 on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 6). Although not shown, shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 72 and 73. By inserting the projection shafts 61 and 62 of the front door frame 14 into these shaft holes, the front door is attached to the inner frame 13. A frame 14 is rotatably supported.

Insertion holes 74 for inserting hooks 63 provided on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front surface of the resin base 71 on the front end side of the rotation (on the right side in FIG. 6). The pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13 . Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by engaging the hook 63 with the locking device through the insertion hole 74 .

A cylinder lock 75 for unlocking the locking device is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 71 . The cylinder lock 75 is integrated with a locking device, and the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13 by turning a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 to the left. The inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11 by turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 to the right. A substantially rectangular opening 71b penetrating inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction) is formed at the upper right corner of the resin base 71, that is, at the front end of the front door frame 14 when rotating. A first monitoring device 250 for monitoring opening of the front door frame 14 is provided in the opening 71b.

A substantially elliptical window hole 76 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 71 . A game board 81 is detachably attached to the resin base 71 . The game board 81 is made of plywood, and the game area 104 (see FIG. 7) formed on the front surface of the game board 81 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 76 of the resin base 71 .

<Game board 81>
As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 81 is a substantially rectangular plate member made of plywood or synthetic resin. The game board 81 has a guide portion 103 (hereinafter also referred to as a guide rail) made up of two rails (an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102) curved in a substantially circular shape provided on the front (on the player side). . The guide rail 103 has a function of guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 110 to the upper left part of the game board 81 . A player operates the shooting handle 41 to launch a game ball into a substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 to play the game. In addition, at the end of the guide rail 103, a return portion 103a is provided so that the game ball launched into the game area 104 does not return into the guide rail 103. As shown in FIG. A game ball hit into the game area 104 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided in the back pack unit 15 (not shown), and a ball detection signal of the detection sensor is sent to a hall computer (not shown). is configured to be output to Although the detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit 15 in this embodiment, it may be provided in another location, for example, the game board 81 .

In addition, the game board 81 is router-processed so that a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the board thickness direction are formed at appropriate positions. In each opening of the game board 81, a general winning opening 82, a first starting opening 84a, a second starting opening 84b, a variable winning device 83 and an out opening 87 are provided. The position and number of openings formed in the game area 104 of the game board 81 can be changed as needed. The game board 81 is provided with through gates 85 on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion. A main display device 98 is provided at a position of the game board 81 that can be visually recognized by the player. A variable display unit 86 is provided in the center of the game board 81 . A large number of game nails 89 are provided in the game area 104 of the game board 81 , and a rotation guide member 88 (so-called “windmill”) is arranged on the right side of the game board 81 . The rotation guide member 88 is arranged on the game board 81 so as to freely rotate upon contact with a game ball flowing down the game area 104 . Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the game area 104 contacts the game nail 89 or the rotation guide member 88, the flowing direction of the game ball changes irregularly (randomly).

In addition, in this embodiment, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area 104 continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area 104 . In addition, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of a game ball into the out port 87, the entry of a game ball into various winning ports is also referred to as winning. Also, entering the through gate 85 refers to continuing to flow down the game area 104 without being ejected from the game area 104 after passing through the gate provided in the game area 104 . The entry of the ball into the through gate 85 is also referred to as a prize, as is the entry into various prize openings. Further, the game ball flowing down the game area 104 while contacting the game nail 89 and/or the rotation guide member 88 is also called rolling.

<Starting Prize Entrance>
As shown in FIG. 7, the first starting port 84a and the second starting port 84b are arranged side by side in a vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting opening 84a located on the upper side is a constantly open type winning opening that always opens upward within the game area 104. As shown in FIG. In addition, on both left and right sides of the second starting port 84b located on the lower side, an electric accessory (so-called electric tulip (electric chu)) consisting of a pair of opening and closing members 84b1 configured to open and close the second starting port 84b. is provided. The pair of opening/closing members 84b1 is connected to an electric accessory driving portion 84b2 as a driving means, and the pair of opening/closing members 84b1 closes the second starting port 84b as the electric accessory driving portion 84b2 is driven. It is configured to be displaced between a position and an open position for opening. In this embodiment, a pair of opening/closing members 84b1 for opening and closing the second starting port 84b are arranged on the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting port 84b. The mutual positions are driven toward and away from each other.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 84a is configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area 104 can always win with a certain probability, and the second starting port 84b drives the electric accessory driving section 84b2. is configured to vary the winning probability of the game ball. Here, in a state in which the opening/closing members 84b1 provided on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 84b are displaced to the closed position (hereinafter referred to as "electric closed state"), entry of game balls into the second starting port 84b is prevented. Therefore, the probability that the game ball enters the second start port 84b is lower than the probability that the game ball enters the first start port 84a. In addition, in a state in which the opening/closing member 84b1 is displaced to the open position (hereinafter referred to as the electrical open state), the game ball received by the opening/closing member 84b1 is guided to the second starting port 84b, and is played to the first starting port 84a. The probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 84b is higher than the probability that the ball wins.

It should be noted that, instead of the electric function closed state and the electric function open state described above, the electric accessory is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 84b (unlike the electric function closed state, the game ball can be entered). state) and a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 84b.

<Variable winning device>
As shown in FIG. 7, the variable prize winning device 83 has a rectangular plate-shaped opening and closing door that opens and closes a special prize winning opening 83a (hereinafter referred to as a "big prize winning opening") as a special prize winning means that opens in the game area 104. (Opening/closing member, opening/closing means) 83b is provided, and the opening/closing door 83b is configured to be displaced between a closed state in which the door 83b is closed and an open state in which the door 83b is opened in accordance with the driving of a variable winning drive unit 83c as a driving means. In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 83b is configured to swing back and forth to open and close the special winning opening. FIG. showing.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 83b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, in the internal lottery, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to, the opening/closing door 83b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 83b is set to an open state and a game ball can enter the big winning opening 83a. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode, after the opening and closing door 83b is set to the open state, until it is set to the closed state again, one round game is set, but the opening and closing door 83b in one round game The number of times of opening and closing is arbitrary. For example, the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing door 83b in one round game may be a plurality of times (two times or more), and in this case, the open state and closed state of the opening and closing door 83b are set a plurality of times in one round game. It will happen.

The player maximizes the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 41, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104 from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 103 is formed to the opposite side. The game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 83 avoiding the variable display unit 86 and the like by shifting to (so-called right hitting).

<Detection sensor>
The game board 81 detects the entry of game balls in the vicinity of various winning openings such as a general winning opening 82, a first starting opening 84a, a second starting opening 84b and a large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. Detection sensors 152 to 154b are provided (see FIG. 16). Further, these detection sensors 152 to 154b are arranged on the back side of the game board 81, the detection sensor 152 detects the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 82, and the detection sensor 154a detects the entrance of the game ball to the first start opening 84a. , the detection sensor 154b detects the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 84b, and the detection sensor 153 detects the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. detect. The detection sensors 152 to 154b are wired to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and detection of game balls by the detection sensors 152 to 154b (general prize winning opening 82, first starting opening 84a , the second starting port 84b and the winning of game balls to various winning ports of the large winning port 83a of the variable winning device 83), a predetermined number of winning balls (game balls obtained by winning) are paid out. ing.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when the detection sensor 152 detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening 82, and the detection sensor 154a detects that the ball has entered the first start opening 84a. When it is detected, three prize balls are paid out, and when the detection sensor 154b detects that the ball has entered the second start port 84b, two prize balls are paid out, and the detection sensor 153 detects the size of the variable winning device 83. When the ball entering the winning hole 83a is detected, 13 prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the winning of game balls into various prize-winning ports is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the first starting port 84a and the number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 84b may be the same number. In addition, a plurality of (two or more) variable winning devices 83 are provided in the game area 104 of the game board 81, and the number of prize balls to be paid out for each winning to the large winning opening 83a of the plurality of variable winning devices 83 is varied. Alternatively, for example, when two variable winning devices 83 are provided, the numbers of prize balls paid out by winning to the big winning opening 83a of each variable winning device 83 may be 13 and 14, respectively.

The out port 87 is provided at the lowest part of the game area 104 of the game board 81 , and the game balls that have not entered various prize winning ports are discharged from the game area 104 through the out port 87 . The out port 87 is provided on the back side of the game board 81 and has a detection sensor 156 for detecting the entry of a game ball (see FIG. 16).

In addition, each through gate 85 is provided on the back side of the game board 81, and includes a detection sensor 155 for detecting entry of a game ball (see FIG. 16). The detection sensors 155 and 156 are wire-connected to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 is different from the case where a ball is entered into various prize-winning holes. When a ball enters 87 or each through gate 85, prize balls are not paid out.

The detection sensors 152 to 156 need only be able to individually detect the entry of game balls into various winning holes, and for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor or a transmissive photosensor can be used.

<symbol display>
The main display device 98 has a main display unit 93, a character object display unit 94, and a round display unit 97, and includes a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display, or the like. is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices. The main display device 98 is provided on the game board 81 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof, and is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. ing. Also, the distance (gap) between the main display device 98 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. For this reason, game balls are prevented from flowing down in the gap between the main display device 98 and the window panel 22 , that is, in front of the main display device 98 .

<Main display section 93>
The main display portion 93 has a first result display portion 93a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the first start opening 84a, and the display portion 93a for displaying the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the second starting opening 84b. and a second result display portion 93b for displaying the result of the internal lottery (see FIG. 16).

<First result display section 93a>
The first result display unit 93a executes the variable display of the symbols with the winning to the first start port 84a as a trigger, and the stop result of the variable display is performed based on the winning to the first start port 84a. Display the results of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 84a as a trigger, the first result display section 93a sequentially turns on and off to perform a blinking variable display, and finally the first result display section 93a. It is designed to display a plurality of types (types) of special symbols depending on the lighting position (stop result) where is definitely lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 93a displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. .

<Second result display portion 93b>
The second result display unit 93b executes the variable display of the symbols with the winning to the second starting port 84b as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it is performed based on the winning to the second starting port 84b. Display the results of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b as a trigger, the second result display section 93b sequentially turns on and off to perform a blinking variable display, and finally the second result display section 93b. is designed to display a plurality of types (types) of special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as special symbols) depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit. When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 93b displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. .

Here, the special figure is a pattern for notification indicating the result of internal lottery such as whether it is a jackpot (specific game) or not. It is possible to display multiple types of special figures. Specifically, the special figures that can be displayed in the first result display portion 93a and the second result display portion 93b include a plurality of kinds of special figures as a big win display result that can recognize a big win, and a loss that can be recognized as a big win. One type of special figure is set as a display result. Then, one special figure is determined according to the result of the lottery per special figure, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the previously decided special figure is stopped and displayed in the first result display section 93a or the second result display section 93b. be done.

In the following description, the variable display performed in the first result display unit 93a is referred to as "special figure 1 variable display", and as a result of the special figure 1 variable display, the fixed stop display is displayed in the first result display unit 93a Toku-zu is also called Toku-zu 1. Similarly, the variation display performed in the second result display unit 93b is referred to as "second special figure variation display", and as a result of the second special figure variation display, the special figure that is fixed and displayed in the second result display unit 93b is also called special figure 2.

<Accessory display unit 94>
The character object display unit 94 executes variable display of symbols with the winning of each through gate 85 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85. to display the results of Specifically, when a game ball enters each of the through gates 85, the character object display unit 94 sequentially turns on and off to perform a blinking variable display, and finally, the character object display unit 94 A plurality of types of normal patterns (hereinafter also referred to as normal patterns) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is lit definitely. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, the role item display unit 94 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. do. In this electric operation open state, the opening/closing member 84b1 of the electric accessory provided in the second starting port 84b is in an open state.

<Round display portion 97>
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot determination, one jackpot game is determined from a plurality of types of jackpot games (specific games) to be described later. A plurality of types of jackpot games with different numbers of rounds are set, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game won is notified by the round display section 97. - 特許庁In this embodiment, two types of “15 times” and “2 times” are set as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds is notified by the lighting pattern of the LED provided in the round display section 97 . In this embodiment, the round display unit 97 has two LEDs arranged on the left and right. When the LED on the left side lights up, it is notified that the number of rounds is "15 times" for the jackpot game, and the LED on the right side By turning on the LED, it is notified that the number of rounds is "twice" in the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 93 and character object display unit 94 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as segment displays and dot displays, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 93 and the character object display unit 94 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched for display, or the like can be adopted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the round display unit 97 notifies the number of round games by means of light emission display using LEDs, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. , a dot matrix, or another type of display device may be used to notify the number of round games. The display areas of the main display section 93, the character display section 94, and the round display section 97 are set to be extremely small compared to the display areas of the notification effect, which will be described later, executed by the pattern display device 91. A player who pays attention to various effects executed on the pattern display device 91 can easily recognize each piece of information in the lighting state of the main display section 93, the character display section 94, and the round display section 97. it's getting harder.

The variable display unit 86 also includes a pattern display device 91 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 86 has a center frame 92 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 91 . The upper portion of the center frame 92 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

<Pattern display device 91>
The symbol display device 91 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and is detachably attached to the game board 81 so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 faces the front side (player side) of the game board 81. It is This pattern display device 91 is triggered by establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b), and displays a variable display of a decorative pattern for production (hereinafter also referred to as a decorative pattern). Start. That is, when the symbol display device 91 performs the variable display in the first result display portion 93a of the main display portion 93 and when the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93 performs the variable display, to execute the variable display. The pattern display device 91 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or the like, as well as a drum type pattern display device or a dot matrix type pattern display device. Various conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and variably displaying various patterns such as .

As shown in FIG. 8, in the pattern display device 91 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of pattern display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 capable of variably displaying decoration symbols are set. Triggered by winning a prize in the starting port 84b, the decoration figures start to change in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. In addition, the effective stop position of the decorative figure is set in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the stop symbols that combine the effective stop positions of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed by the symbol variation effect. The pattern combination of the decoration figures to be stopped and displayed on the activated line L is derived. In the pattern display device 91 according to the present embodiment, three pattern display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are set in a left and right horizontal arrangement, and each of the pattern display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 has an effective decorative pattern. One stop position is determined for each one, and a pattern variation effect consisting of three rows of decorations is performed. That is, one stop symbol effective line L is set in the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment. In the following description, the symbol display row Z1, the symbol display row Z2, and the symbol display row Z3 may be referred to in order from the left.

In addition, the display area of the decorative figure in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the symbol display device 91 is configured with a larger area than the first result display section 93a and the second result display section 93b. The decorative drawing is displayed much larger than the figure. Therefore, the player can visually recognize whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L of the symbol display device 91 is a big win or is a miss.

The symbol display device 91 is configured to perform variable display such that the decorative symbols move along a predetermined variation direction (vertical direction from top to bottom in this embodiment) when the symbol variation effect is started. , the decorative figures that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop order at the effective stop positions of the respective symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. In addition, the symbol display device 91 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the effective stop positions of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 before the completion of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. One pattern variation effect is completed by stopping and displaying the decorative figure. That is, the design variation production (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is performed based on one start reservation information (special figure 1 and special figure 2) From the start of fluctuation to the fixed stop It is designed to be executed once.

Here, "variable display" refers to a state in which the decorative symbols displayed at the effective stop positions in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changed in a predetermined order. In addition, the "determined stop" of the decoration figure means that the decoration figure continues at the effective stop position in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for a predetermined special figure fluctuation interval time (for example, 600ms (milliseconds)). It is the state in which the stop display is displayed. In addition, the "temporary stop" of the decoration figure means that the decoration figure displayed so as to stay at the effective stop position in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is not continuously stopped during the special figure fluctuation interval time. is. That is, the temporary stop of the decoration image includes a state in which the decoration image is displayed in a swinging state at the effective stop position, and a state in which the decoration image is stopped and displayed for a time shorter than the special symbol variation interval time.

Also, in the first result display unit 93a and the symbol display device 91, the special figure 1 variable display and the symbol variation effect related to the special figure 1 variable display are started, and the special figure 1 and the decorative figure are fixed and stopped. Similarly, in the second result display unit 93b and the symbol display device 91, the second special figure variation display and the symbol variation effect related to the second special figure variation display are started, and the special figure 2 and the decoration figure are fixed and stopped. be. In addition, the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, the special figure fluctuation display is not performed at the same time, and the special figure fluctuation in either the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b If the display is performed, the other special figure fluctuation display is not performed.

Here, in the pattern display device 91 according to the present embodiment, 10 kinds of numbers from "0" to "9" are set as basic decoration figures in each of the pattern display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. The figures are variably displayed in order in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. It should be noted that the pattern display device 91 is not limited to this, and the pattern display device 91 is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only. In addition, the decoration diagram includes a first identification pattern that allows the player to definitely recognize that a variable probability state (described later) will be given after the end of the jackpot game, and the possibility of being given a variable probability state after the jackpot game. It is classified as a second identification pattern that can be recognized non-deterministically.

Here, as the first identification pattern, it is possible to appropriately set a basic decorative pattern, or to use a predetermined special decorative pattern other than the basic decorative pattern. For example, odd numbers of "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" and even numbers of "0", "2", "4", "6" and "8" are the first , and the even-numbered symbols "0", "2", "4", "6" and "8" can be used as the second identification symbols. In this way, the player can display the decorations of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 which are fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop positions (stop symbol effective line L) of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the symbol display device 91. From the drawing, it is possible to grasp whether or not a winning game is awarded. In this embodiment, the winning symbol combination is a symbol combination in which the same decoration symbol is fixed and stopped at the effective stop position of each symbol display row (for example, "1.1.1", "2.2.2", etc.). ) is set.

The symbol combination of the decoration figures that can recognize the big win becomes a winning display result, and a big winning game advantageous to the player is awarded after the completion of the symbol variation performance. On the other hand, if even one pattern of all rows fixedly displayed at the effective stop position of the pattern display device 91 is of a different type, it means that the combination of the symbols is, in principle, a "missing" that does not give a jackpot game. can recognize A pattern combination of the decoration figures that can recognize the deviation is the result of the deviation display.

Further, the symbol display device 91 displays a symbol combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the displayed special symbols as a result of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first result display section 93a and the second result display section 93b. That is, the special symbols displayed on the first result display portion 93a and the second result display portion 93b correspond to the symbol combinations of the decoration symbols displayed on the symbol display device 91, and when the symbol variation effect is completed, , The special symbols are confirmed and stopped on the first result display portion 93a and the second result display portion 93b, and the decoration symbols are confirmed and stopped on each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the symbol display device 91. ing. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the symbol combination of the decorative figures for the special symbols one-to-one, and one special symbol may be made to correspond to the symbol combination of a plurality of decorative figures.

The center frame 92 includes a first holding lamp portion 95a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 91, a second holding lamp portion 95b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 91, and a pattern display. and a third holding lamp portion 96 provided in the upper region of the device 91 .

<Holding lamp>
The first reservation lamp part 95a has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 84a, and the same number of LEDs as the reserved number of game balls are lit. The pachinko machine 10 can reserve up to four game balls. For this reason, the number of LEDs provided in the first reservation lamp portion 95a is four, which is the same as the maximum number of reserved game balls. Also, the first pending lamp portion 95a corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 93a and the symbol display device 91. FIG. That is, the number of reservations displayed on the first reservation lamp portion 95a is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the first start port 84a, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the first result display portion 93a is performed. be.

The second reservation lamp part 95b has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won the second starting port 84b, and the same number of LEDs as the reserved number of game balls are lit. The pachinko machine 10 can reserve up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the second reservation lamp portion 95b is four, which is the same as the maximum number of game balls to be reserved. Also, the second pending lamp portion 95b corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 93b and the symbol display device 91. FIG. That is, the number of reservations displayed in the second reservation lamp portion 95b is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start port 84b, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the second result display portion 93b is performed. be.

The third reservation lamp part 96 has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 85, and the LED lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. The pachinko machine 10 can hold up to four game balls on the third holding lamp part 96. - 特許庁Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the third reservation lamp portion 96 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of game balls that are reserved. Also, the second holding lamp portion 95b corresponds to the variable display of the character object display portion 94. FIG. That is, the number of reservations displayed on the third reservation lamp section 96 is incremented by 1 when a game ball enters each through gate 85, and is decremented by 1 each time a variable display is performed on the character display section 94. .

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the number of reserved game balls by lighting the LEDs of the respective reserved lamp portions 95a, 95b, and 96. Other configurations, such as informing the number of game balls that have entered the starting port 84a, the second starting port 84b, and the respective through gates 85, may be used. In the pachinko machine 10, the number of LEDs provided in each of the holding lamp units 95a to 96 is four corresponding to the maximum holding number of 4. ” to “2”, the LEDs are “lit” in order from the left or right, and when the number of reservations is “3” to “4”, the number of reservations is notified to the player by “blinking” in order from the left or right. You may make it

The game ball shooting mechanism 110 is attached below the window hole 76 in the resin base 71, as shown in FIG. The game ball shooting mechanism 110 is composed of an electromagnetic solenoid 111, a shooting rail 112, and a ball feed mechanism 113. When an electrical signal is input to the solenoid 111, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 moves in the expansion/contraction direction. , the game ball placed on the shooting rail 112 by the ball feeding mechanism 113 is launched toward the game area.

Between the launch rail 112 and the inner and outer rails 101, 102 attached to the game board 81, there is a gap of a predetermined interval, and below this gap is the foul formed in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. A ball passage 55 is provided (see FIG. 5). Therefore, if a game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 does not reach the upper part of the game area and goes back along the guide rail composed of the inner and outer rails 101 and 102, the foul ball is a foul ball. Enter the ball passage 55 . The foul ball passage 55 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage 52, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage 55 is discharged to the lower tray 34. - 特許庁

Below the launch rail 112 in the resin base 71, a substantially rectangular opening 71c penetrating inward and outward (that is, in the front-rear direction) is formed (see FIG. 4). A second monitoring device 290 for monitoring opening of the inner frame 13 is fitted in the opening 71c. Details of the second monitoring device 290 will be described later.

A passage forming portion (see FIG. 2) 121 is provided on the resin base 71 to the left of the firing rail 112 so as to pass through the resin base 71 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 9, the passage forming portion 121 is formed with a main body side upper tray passage 122 and a main body side lower tray passage 123 . The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicate with a game ball distribution section 225 which will be described later. Further, below the passage forming portion 121, the socket portion 53 of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted. A front door side upper tray passage 51 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage 123 (see FIG. 5).

Below the passage forming portion 121 in the resin base 71, an opening/closing member 124 (see FIG. 9) for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at its lower end, and is urged to a front position (not shown) to close the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 . A biasing member is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown to close the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123. As shown in FIG. Thus, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage 122 or the main body side lower tray passage 123, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open by the receptacle portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage 51 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage 52 communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described. 9 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. FIG.
A locking device 131 is provided on the back surface of the resin base 71 on the front end side of the rotation (left side in FIG. 9). Unlocking of the frame 14 is performed. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 9, a rear pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the rear pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side of the rear surface of the inner frame 13 .

A bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rear surface of the resin base 71 on the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 9). Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be vertically spaced apart, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133 . A fastening hole 134 for fastening the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13 is provided on the rear surface of the resin base 71 .

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 71, and the game board 81 is attached to the resin base 71 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 81 will be described. 10 is a perspective view of the game board 81 viewed from the rear, and FIG. 11 is a rear view showing a state in which the main controller unit 160 is removed from the game board 81. As shown in FIG.

A variable display unit 86 arranged in the center of the game board 81 is provided with a synthetic resin frame cover 141 that covers the center frame 92 from behind and protrudes rearward. The pattern display device 91 described above is attached, and a display control device for driving the pattern display device is attached (not shown). The pattern display device 91 and the display control device are stacked in the longitudinal direction (the pattern display device is in the front and the display control device is in the rear), and the sound lamp control device unit 142 is mounted behind it. The audio lamp control device unit 142 includes an audio emission control device 400 (not shown in FIGS. 9 to 11) and a mounting base 144. The audio emission control device 400 is mounted on the mounting base 144. It is

The audio light emission control device 400 includes an audio lamp control board that controls audio, lamp display, and the display control device 500 in accordance with instructions from the main control device 300, which will be described later. It is housed in a board box 145 made of.

A collective plate unit (not shown) is provided below the variable display unit 86 on the back surface of the game board 81 . The gathering plate unit is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

The game ball recovery mechanism will be explained with reference to FIG. A recovery passage 151 is formed corresponding to the part and converging at one place on the downstream side. Therefore, all of the game balls that have won the general winning hole 82 or the like gather below the game board 81 via the collection passage 151 . Below the game board 81 there is a discharge passage, which will be described later, and the game balls collected under the game board 81 are discharged into the discharge passage by the collection passage 151 . Incidentally, the out port 87 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won any of the prize winning ports are led out into the discharge passage through the out port 87.例文帳に追加

Similarly, the winning detection mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 11. The collective plate unit is provided with detection sensors 152 at positions corresponding to the general winning openings 82 on the front side of the game board 81 . A detection sensor 153 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 83, and detection sensors 154a and 154b are provided at positions corresponding to the first and second starting ports 84a and 84b. Winning of game balls is detected by these detection sensors 152 to 154b. Further, a detection sensor 155 for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 85 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 86 outside the gathering plate unit. A detection sensor 156 is provided at a position corresponding to the out port 87 .

As shown in FIG. 10, a main controller unit 160 is mounted on the rear surface of the game board 81 so as to cover the collecting board unit from the rear side. The configuration of main controller unit 160 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main controller unit 160. As shown in FIG.
The main controller unit 160 has a synthetic resin mount 161 on which a main controller 300 (not shown in FIG. 12) is mounted. The main control device 300 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 made of, for example.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing parts 164 are provided on the long side of the board box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are unopenably connected. and are connected in an unopenable manner. The sealing process by the sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been done. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of sealing portions 164 . When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein, or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily found that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of coupling pieces 165 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 165 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 166 formed on the mounting table 161 , and the connecting pieces 165 and the connecting pieces 166 connect the board box 163 and the mounting table 161 together. A sealing process is performed.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained. 13 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG.
The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 to which a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board 203 (see FIG. 3), and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached. The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and has a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 which protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 86 .

A pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 are provided at the right end of the base portion 211 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the locking pins 214 into the bearing portions 133 provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack is formed. A unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 . Further, the base portion 211 is provided with fasteners 215 for fastening to the fastening holes 134 provided in the inner frame 13 . A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the frame 13. - 特許庁

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . That is, a tank 221 opened upward is provided at the uppermost part of the back pack 201, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. A tank rail 222 gently sloping downstream is connected to the lower side of the tank 221 , and a vertically extending case rail 223 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222 . A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution portion 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224 .

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. Communicates with the upper tray 33 via the side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage 51, and the central opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage 52, An outer opening is formed to communicate with the discharge passage.

A back pack substrate (electric power receiving section or external power receiving section) 229 is installed in the dispensing mechanism section 202 . A main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied to the back pack board 229, and the power supply is turned on or off by switching operation of the power switch 229a.

A discharge passage board 203 (see FIG. 3) and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear direction. The discharge passage board 203 has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls discharged from the recovery passage 151 or the like described above to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. discharged to

The control device assembly unit 204 has a mounting base 241 having a horizontally long shape, and the mounting base 241 is equipped with a payout control device 242 and a power supply and launch control device 243 (hereinafter also referred to as a power supply and launch control device 243). there is The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged so that the payout control device 242 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 242 contains a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 in a board box 244 . The payout command signal from the payout control device 242 to the payout device 224 is relayed by the back pack board 229 described above. Also, the payout control device 242 is provided with a state return switch 245 . For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state return switch 245 clears the ball clogging.

An external terminal plate 213 is provided on the right side of the board box 244 . The external terminal plate 213 has an output terminal for outputting various error information generated in the pachinko machine 10, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the inner frame 13 is opened, and a signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened. An output terminal and the like are provided for this purpose. Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device (or hall computer) on the game hall side.

The power supply/firing control device 243 has a power supply and a firing control board housed in a board box 246. The board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and furthermore, the firing handle by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of 41 is performed. A RAM erase switch 247 is also provided in the power/emission control device 243 . This pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure is retained, and upon recovery from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It's becoming Therefore, if the power is cut off in a normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the cut-off is stored, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 247, the RAM data is initialized. It's like

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 9, etc., a first monitoring device 250 and a second monitoring device 290 are attached to the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13 . As shown in FIGS. 3 and 9, a rear pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the rear pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side of the rear surface of the inner frame 13 . The first monitoring device 250 is arranged above the inner frame 13 on the opening/closing tip side, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by this first monitoring device 250 . On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the inner frame 13 . Specifically, it is arranged below the lower edge of the back pack unit 15 when the back pack unit 15 is closed, and is visible from behind the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 4). The opening of the inner frame 13 is monitored by this second monitoring device 290 . Further, the opening of the back pack unit 15 is detected by the back pack unit open detector 289 .

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 9, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 are attached to the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. The first monitoring device 250 is arranged above the inner frame 13 on the opening/closing tip side, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by this first monitoring device 250 . On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the inner frame 13 . Specifically, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the lower edge of the back pack unit 15 in the closed state of the back pack unit 15, and is used to open the gaming machine body 12, in other words, to open the inner frame 13. Release is monitored.

The first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 have the same configuration, but differ in the mounting direction and accompanying configuration. Therefore, only the configuration of the first monitoring device 250 will be described here, and the configuration of the second monitoring device 290 will be omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the first monitoring device 250 includes a storage case body 251 and a lid case body 280. Both the case bodies 251 and 280 are fixed by fasteners such as screws. A housing 252 is formed. The housing 252 (both case bodies 251 and 280) is made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin material having optical transparency, and the inside of the housing 252 is visible. Therefore, the inside of the first monitoring device 250 can be easily checked, and maintenance and the like can be facilitated. Since it is easy to check the inside of the first monitoring device 250 in this way, it is easy to discover fraudulent acts such as obstructing the monitoring function of the first monitoring device 250 .

The first monitoring device 250 is arranged at an upper corner of the resin base 71 with the storage case body 251 on the front side and the lid case body 280 on the rear side. In such a state, it is fixed to the rear surface of the resin base 71 with fasteners such as bolts.
The storage case body 251 has a top plate portion 253, a bottom plate portion 254, a front plate portion 255, a left side plate portion 256, and a right side plate portion 257, and when attached to the upper part of the inner frame 13 on the opening/closing tip side, the pachinko machine can operate. The rear side of 10 is formed in the shape of a box opened. The front plate portion 255 is substantially parallel to the rear surface of the resin base 71 . The front plate portion 255 is formed with an upper extension portion 258 extending upward from the boundary with the top plate portion 253 and a lower extension portion 259 extending downward from the boundary with the bottom plate portion 254. Protrusions 258 and 259 are in contact with the rear surface of resin base 71 .

Both extending portions 258 and 259 are provided with round holes 258a and 259a, respectively, into which cylindrical boss portions formed on the resin base 71 are fitted. The first monitoring device 250 is positioned vertically and horizontally by fitting cylindrical bosses into the round holes 258a and 259a.

A protruding portion 260 protruding forward in a stepped manner is formed at the lower portion of the front plate portion 255 , and an opening 71 b corresponding to the protruding portion 260 is formed in the resin base 71 . The opening 71b is a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the projecting portion 260. As shown in FIG. By fitting the projecting portion 260 into the opening portion 71b, the boundary portion between the resin base 71 and the first monitoring device 250 has a crank shape. As a result, inconvenience such as insertion of an illegal tool or the like from the boundary between the opening 71b and the projecting portion 260 is suppressed. Further, the dimensions of the front surface of the resin base 71 and the front surface of the overhanging portion 260 are set so that they are substantially flush with each other, and the overhanging portion 260 is configured so as not to project forward beyond the resin base 71 . ing. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the problem that the position of the first monitoring device 250 is displaced due to the protruding portion 260 being caught during maintenance work or the like.

Inside the housing 252 (more specifically, inside the storage case body 251), there are a detection device 265 for detecting the open/closed state of the front door frame 14, and an operating mechanism that continuously operates when power is supplied. 275 are installed.

The detection device 265 is arranged behind the opening 71 b of the resin base 71 , that is, behind the projecting portion 260 . More specifically, it is arranged on the front end side of the rotation of the front door frame 14 inside the storage case body 251 . The detection device 265 includes a light-emitting element 266 (photodiode) that emits light, a light-receiving element 267 (phototransistor) that receives light from the light-emitting element 266, and a housing 268 that houses the light-emitting element 266 and the light-receiving element 267. I have.

The container 268 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped main body portion 269 and protruding portions 269 a and 269 b that protrude in the left-right direction from the lower portion of the main body portion 269 . The container 268 is arranged such that its front surface is parallel to the front plate portion 255 . Each projecting portion 269a, 269b is formed in a plate shape parallel to the bottom plate portion 254, and each projecting portion 269a, 269b is fitted (inserted) into a first guide groove 270 formed in the housing case body 251. As a result, the detection device 265 is attached to the housing case body 251 .
The first guide grooves 270 are opposed to each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and their rear ends are open to the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and projections 269a and 269b are inserted into the first guide grooves 270. As a result, the outer peripheral surfaces of the protruding portions 269a and 269b and the inner peripheral surface of the first guide groove 270 come into contact with each other, and movement of the detecting device 265 in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted.

A contact portion 271 is provided at the front portion of the first guide groove 270 with which the container 268 contacts. The contact portion 271 protrudes toward the inside of the storage case body 251, and has an upper contact surface 271a parallel to the inner surface of the bottom plate portion 254 and a rear contact surface 271b parallel to the inner surface of the front plate portion 255. are doing. When the detection device 265 is pushed along the first guide groove 270, the container 268 and the rear side contact surface 271b are brought into contact with each other. This restricts the forward movement of the detection device 265 . In this state where forward movement is restricted, a predetermined gap is secured between the front plate portion 255 of the storage case body 251 and the detection device 265 . The housing body 268 is fixed to the housing case body 251 by fasteners such as screws while its movement in the forward, left-right, and vertical directions is restricted as described above.

Through-holes 269c and 269d penetrating in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side in the main body 269 of the container 268 with a predetermined gap therebetween. A light-emitting element 266 and a light-receiving element 267 are fitted in the through holes 269c and 269d, respectively, with the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion directed forward. The through holes 269c and 269d are arranged above the upper contact surface 271a (contact portion 271) so that the contact portion 271 does not block the passage of light between the elements 272 and 273. . More specifically, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 is emitted from the storage case body 251 without being blocked by the contact portion 271 , and radiates toward the rear surface of the front door frame 14 . The central axes of the through holes 269 c and 269 d are perpendicular to the front plate portion 255 , and the central axes of the elements 266 and 267 are also perpendicular to the front plate portion 255 . Therefore, when the light from the light emitting element 266 is incident on the front plate portion 255, it is less likely to be refracted or reflected.

As shown in FIG. 5 , a light reflecting member 274 that reflects light from the light emitting element 266 toward the light receiving element 267 is provided in front of the detection device 265 , that is, on the back side of the front door frame 14 . The light reflecting member 274 is fixed to the front door frame 14 by fasteners such as screws while being accommodated in the accommodation recess 14a formed in the front door frame 14, so that the light reflecting member 274 does not protrude from the rear surface of the front door frame 14. suppressed.
The light reflecting member 274 is composed of a glass prism having optical transparency. When the front door frame 14 is not opened, in other words when the front door frame 14 is closed, the light from the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274 and the reflected light is received by the light receiving element 267. be.
On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is opened, in other words, when the front door frame 14 is not closed, the position of the light reflecting member 274 is displaced by opening the front door frame 14 . Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 is reflected in a different direction by the light reflecting member 274 , and the reflected light is not received by the light receiving element 267 .

Next, the operating mechanism 275 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the operating mechanism 275 is arranged to the side of the detecting device 265, and its main components are a solenoid 276 provided as a power source for the operating mechanism 275 and a solenoid 276. and an operating shaft 277 inserted through.

The solenoid 276 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction, and is provided with an attachment portion 278 to the housing case body 251 at its upper portion. The mounting portion 278 is formed in a plate shape parallel to the top plate portion 253 of the storage case body 251 and is fitted in a second guide groove 279 formed in the top plate portion 253 and the left side plate portion 256 . These second guide grooves 279 face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and their rear ends are open to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 . By inserting the mounting portion 278 from the rear end side of the second guide groove 279 and pushing in the solenoid 276, the operation mechanism 275 is mounted. By inserting the attachment portion 278 into the second guide groove 279 in this way, the outer peripheral surface of the attachment portion 278 and the inner peripheral surface of the second guide groove 279 come into contact with each other. This restricts movement of the operating mechanism 275 in the vertical and horizontal directions. By pushing the operation mechanism 275 along the second guide groove 279, the mounting portion 278 and the front plate portion 255 of the storage case body 251 are brought into contact with each other, and the forward movement of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted. The operation mechanism 275 is fixed to the storage case body 251 with fasteners such as screws while movement in each direction is thus restricted. In this embodiment, the second guide groove 279 is provided in order to improve the mounting workability of the operation mechanism 275, but the configuration may be such that they are not provided.

The operating shaft 277 has an iron cylindrical portion 277a extending vertically. Most of the cylindrical portion 277a is housed inside the solenoid 276. As shown in FIG. The central axis of the columnar portion 277a and the central axis of the solenoid 276 overlap each other, and the operating shaft 277 is movable in the direction of the central axis of the solenoid 276. As shown in FIG. The lower end of the operating shaft 277 protrudes outside the solenoid 276, and the lower end of the plate-shaped shielding portion 277b and the crank portion 277c offset the shielding portion 277b from the operating shaft 277 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. integrally molded. In this embodiment, the cylindrical portion 277a, the shielding portion 277b and the crank portion 277c of the operating shaft 277 are integrally formed, but they can be formed individually. For example, only the cylindrical portion 277a may be made of iron, and the shielding portion 277b and the crank portion 277c may be made of synthetic resin.

The shielding portion 277 b is formed substantially parallel to the front plate portion 255 and moves parallel to the front plate portion 255 following the vertical movement of the operating shaft 277 . In addition, the shielding portion 277b is arranged so as to be on the front side of the detecting device 265 by the crank portion 277c, and the space formed between the detecting device 265 and the front plate portion 255 provides a clearance for its operation ( operating clearance) is ensured. The lower end of the shielding portion 277b contacts the upper contact surface 271a at its lower limit position. In such a contact state, the shielding portion 277b overlaps the light receiving element 267 when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. In other words, the front side of the light receiving element 267 is covered. On the other hand, the lower end of the shielding portion 277b is set above the light receiving element 267 when the shielding portion 277b is at the upper limit position. In other words, the front side of the light receiving element 267 is not covered. The shielding portion 277b is coated with a paint that absorbs light (a paint with a low light reflectance) so that the light from other light sources is reflected by the shielding portion 277b and does not reach the light receiving element 267. It is In this embodiment, the shielding portion 277b is configured to overlap only the light receiving element 267, but may be configured to overlap the light emitting element 266, or may be configured to overlap both the light receiving element 267 and the light emitting element 266. .

In this embodiment, the operating shaft 277 is held at the upper limit position of the operating range when power is supplied to the solenoid 276, in other words, at a position where the front surface of the detecting device 265 is not covered (hereinafter also referred to as the first position). be. Here, the output of the solenoid 276 is set to be large enough to lift the operating shaft 277 against gravity in the energized state. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the operation shaft 277 is lowered by its own weight and held at the lower limit position of the operation range, in other words, the position covering the front surface of the detection device 265 (hereinafter also referred to as the second position). . More specifically, the operating shaft 277 is held at the second position by the shielding portion 277b coming into contact with the upper contact surface 271a. That is, the holding position of the operating shaft 277 changes between the first position and the second position depending on the presence or absence of power supply. In other words, the position of the shielding portion 277b is switched between the first position and the second position as the position of the operating shaft 277 is switched.

A predetermined gap area is set between the lower end portion of the shielding portion 277b at the first position and the upper end portion of the shielding portion 277b at the second position. In other words, the operating distance dimension of the operating shaft 277 is set larger than the axial length dimension of the shielding portion 277b, and the front plate portion 255 (more specifically, the overhang A part of the portion 260) is formed with an insertion hole 260a penetrating inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10). As shown in FIG. 5, the rear surface of the front door frame 14 is provided with a protrusion 14b that can be inserted through the insertion hole 260a. The protrusion 14b is formed integrally with the front door frame 14 and extends rearward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加The tip of the projection 14b is located slightly behind the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Since the projection 14b is provided on the front door frame 14 as described above, it moves as the front door frame 14 rotates. That is, the protrusion 14b is inserted through the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 13, and is not inserted through the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is opened by a predetermined amount or more. state.

When the projection 14b is inserted through the insertion hole 260a, that is, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shielding portion 277b and the projection 14b come into contact with each other, so that the shielding portion 277b is positioned at both the first position and the second position. Movement between them is restricted. More specifically, when the projection 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a while the shielding portion 277b is at the first position, movement of the shielding portion 277b to the second position is restricted. Further, when the projection 14b is inserted while the shielding portion 277b is in the second position, the movement of the shielding portion 277b to the first position is restricted.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame 13 as described above. Therefore, before the hook metal fitting 63 of the front door frame 14 and the bearing metal fitting 132 are locked, the relative positions of the projection 14b and the shielding portion 277b and the insertion hole 260a may vary. For this reason, there is concern that the closing operation of the front door frame 14 may be hindered by the protrusions 14b and the like being caught. In addition, the insertion hole 260 a has a tapered shape that widens toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, catching when inserting the projection 14b is suppressed, and workability when closing the front door frame 14 is ensured.

Next, the relative relationship between the projection 14b and the shielding portion 277b will be described in detail. When the front door frame 14 is closed, the rear end of the protrusion 14b protrudes slightly rearward from the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Therefore, even if the position of the front door frame 14 in the front-rear direction varies slightly, the function of the protrusion 14b is ensured. When the front door frame 14 is opened, the projection 14b moves to a position where it does not overlap the shielding portion 277b and the pachinko machine 10 in a plan view by opening the front door frame 14 at a predetermined angle or more. As a result, the movement restriction (regulation) of the shielding portion 277b is released.

An opening flange 13a extending toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, toward the front door frame 14, is formed integrally with the peripheral portion of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. Due to this opening flange 13a, the peripheral edge of the inner frame 13 and the peripheral edge of the front door frame 14 overlap each other when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the side and from the top. Such a configuration in which the two overlap each other suppresses the inconvenience of inserting an illegal tool or the like from the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . The amount of overlap between the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b is set smaller than the amount of overlap between the opening flange 13a and the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. More specifically, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the shielding portion 277b to the rear end portion of the protrusion 14b is greater than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front edge of the opening flange 13a to the rear edge of the front door frame 14. is also set small. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 rotates and the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b do not overlap each other, the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is not exposed by the opening flange 13a. That is, at a position where the front surface of the inner frame 13 can be visually recognized from the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the movement restriction of the shielding portion 277b by the projection 14b is released. .

Next, the main configuration of the lid case body 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The lid case body 280 has a top plate portion 281, a bottom plate portion 282, a back plate portion 283, a left side plate portion 284 and a right side plate portion 285, and has a box shape that is open to the front of the pachinko machine . The open portion of the lid case body 280 accommodates the rear opening edge of the storage case body 251 . A relay substrate 286 electrically connected to the detection device 265 and the like by a harness (not shown) is arranged inside the lid case body 280 . The relay board 286 has a substantially plate shape parallel to the back plate portion 283 and is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate portion 283 with fasteners such as screws.

A communicating hole 287 penetrating inside and outside is formed behind the relay board 286 , that is, at a portion of the back plate portion 283 facing the relay board 286 . A connector 288 is arranged behind the communication hole 287 . In other words, the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are provided facing each other across the communication hole 287, and the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are electrically connected by a harness or the like (not shown). The connector 288 is fixed to the rear surface of the back plate portion 283 with fasteners such as screws with the insertion opening directed toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 . The first monitoring device 250 and the main control device 300 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown) through the connector 288 . In the present embodiment, the lid case body 280 is configured to have optical transparency as described above, thereby facilitating confirmation of fraud or the like with respect to the first monitoring device 250 . However, it is also possible for the lid case body 280 to have a configuration in which it does not have light transmittance. In this case, the lid case body 280 may be made of, for example, an opaque synthetic resin material or a light metal material such as aluminum.

Next, detection of opening of the front door frame 14 while power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
When power is supplied to the first monitoring device 250, that is, when the solenoid 276 is energized, the solenoid 276 is energized. As a result, the operating shaft 277 is held at the first position. In this state, there is no shielding portion 277b in front of the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 reaches the light receiving element 267 through the light reflecting member 274. FIG. When the light reaches the light-receiving element 267, a light-receiving signal is output to the relay board 286. By reading this light-receiving signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is closed.

When the front door frame 14 is opened while power is being supplied to the first monitoring device 250, the relative positions of the elements 266 and 267 and the light reflecting member 274 change. In this case, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light reflecting member 274 , or even if it does reach the light reflecting member 274 , the reflected light is emitted toward a portion other than the light receiving element 267 . Therefore, light from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light receiving element 267 . Therefore, the predetermined light reception signal is no longer output. By reading the change in the received light signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is closed.

In this way, by making it possible to detect the opening of the front door frame 14 while power is being supplied, it is possible to suppress unauthorized opening of the front door frame 14 during the operation of the game hall. As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppression of fraudulent use of the pachinko machine 10 .

Further, when the power supply to the first monitoring device 250 is stopped due to closing of the store, power outage, or the like, the power supply to the solenoid 276 is stopped and the excitation state is canceled. In this case, the operating shaft 277 and the shielding portion 277b move downward due to their own weight and come into contact with the projection 14b. When the shielding portion 277b abuts against the projection 14b, its downward movement is restricted, and its movement to the second position is restricted. When power supply is started again in this state, the solenoid 276 is energized, and the operating shaft 277 is lifted upward by overcoming the action of its own weight. In this case, since the light from the light emitting element 266 can reach the light receiving element 267, it can be detected that the front door frame 14 is closed. In this way, it is detected that the front door frame 14 was not opened while the power supply was stopped.

Next, a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and closed while the power supply is stopped will be described.
As the front door frame 14 is opened, the projection 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, so that the shielding portion 277b loses its support and moves downward (that is, to the second position) by its own weight. When the shielding portion 277b moves downward, it abuts against the upper contact surface 271a, and further downward movement is restricted. When the front door frame 14 is closed again in this state, the protrusion 14b returns to its original position (the state in which the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a), thereby restricting upward movement of the shielding portion 277b. In this state, the shielding portion 277b is positioned in front of the light receiving element 267, and its vertical movement is restricted by the projection 14b and the upper contact surface 271a. By making the shielding portion 277b immovable from the second position in this way, the fact that the front door frame 14 has been opened is mechanically preserved.

When the power supply is started while the movement of the shielding portion 277b from the second position is restricted, the solenoid 276 is energized and the shielding portion 277b attempts to move upward (that is, to the first position). However, the shielding portion 277b hits the projection 14b and is prevented from moving. That is, the state in which the light receiving element 267 is covered with the shielding portion 277b continues. The light emitting element 266 starts emitting light when the power supply is started. Light emitted from the light emitting element 266 is irradiated toward the light receiving element 267 via the light reflecting member 274 . However, the light reaching the light receiving element 267 is blocked by the shielding portion 277b positioned in front of the light receiving element 267. FIG. As a result, the output of the light reception signal is suppressed, and it is detected that the front door frame 14 is open. Although the front door frame 14 is actually closed, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is open when the power is turned off.

By opening the front door frame 14 again in a state in which the opening of the front door frame 14 at the time of power cutoff is detected as described above, the projection 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, and the shielding portion 277b is moved to the first position. move to That is, the restriction on movement of the shielding portion 277b is released. By operating the front door frame 14 in this manner, the unauthorized opening detection state is canceled and the normal state is restored. Further, with such a configuration, the unauthorized opening detection state is reset when the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, there is no need to provide a reset switch or the like, which contributes to the simplification of the configuration. Moreover, since the opening of the front door frame 14 is performed by a predetermined operation (locking/unlocking operation), it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of illegally canceling the illegal opening detection state.

The second monitoring device 290 also includes a storage case body 251, a lid case body 280, a detection device 265, an operating mechanism 275, a relay board 286 and a connector 288, similarly to the first monitoring device 250. The outer frame 11 is provided with protrusions and light reflecting members corresponding to the device 290 .

In the above description, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 are configured to detect that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened even when the power is shut off when no power is supplied (specifically, is equipped with an operating mechanism 275). However, a configuration for detecting that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened when power is shut off when power is not supplied is essential for this embodiment. Instead of the configuration of , it is sufficient that the opening of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 is detected while power is being supplied. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 may be provided with the detection device 265 that detects the open/closed state of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 .

In the above description, the detection device 265 includes the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267, the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and whether or not the reflected light can be received by the light receiving element 267 is determined. Thus, the opening/closing state of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 is detected. However, in this embodiment, it is sufficient if the open/closed states of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 can be detected. For this reason, for example, the light-emitting element 266 and the light-receiving element 267 are provided at positions facing each other on the back side of the resin base 71 and the front door frame 14, and when the front door frame 14 is closed, the light emitted by the light-emitting element 266 can be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the front door frame 14 is opened. Similarly, regarding the detection of the opening and closing of the inner frame 13, the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are provided at positions facing each other on the front side of the resin base 71 and the inner frame 13, and when the inner frame 13 is closed, The light emitted by the light emitting element 266 can be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the inner frame 13 is open.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are used to detect the opening and closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13. 13 may be detected to be opened or closed. For example, an ultrasonic oscillator may be provided in place of the light emitting element 266 and an ultrasonic wave receiving element may be provided in place of the light receiving element 267 to detect opening/closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 . Further, a magnet may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266 and a magnetic sensor may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect opening/closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 . Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 9, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15. Various mechanisms can be adopted for detecting the opening of the . For example, like the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290, the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 may be used to detect the opening and closing of the back pack unit 15, or instead of the light emitting element 266 , and an ultrasonic wave receiving element instead of the light receiving element 267 may be provided to detect the opening and closing of the back pack unit 15 . Furthermore, a magnet may be provided in place of the light emitting element 266, and a magnetic sensor may be provided in place of the light receiving element 267 to detect opening and closing of the back pack unit 15. Alternatively, a mechanical contact sensor may be provided. good too.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 300, a sound emission control device 400, and a display control device 500, as shown in FIG. These devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 . The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 242 that executes payout control for causing the payout device 224 to pay out game balls, a power supply that supplies necessary power to the pachinko machine 10, and controls the game ball shooting mechanism 110. and firing controls 243, which are mounted on the back pack unit 15;

The main controller 300 includes a main control board 301 that controls the main control of the pachinko machine 10 and a power outage monitoring board 303 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 300 includes a board box that houses the main control board 301 and the like. The substrate box may have a trace structure that leaves a trace upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 301 includes an MPU (Micro-Processing Unit) 302 mounted on the main control board 301, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 312 and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 313 that constitute the MPU 302. there is The MPU 302 is a semiconductor element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc., as well as a ROM 312 and a RAM 313 are integrated into one chip, and is called a one-chip microcomputer. be. In this embodiment, the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 302, but the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 may be individually integrated into chips. Also, although the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are physically separated individual memories, they may be one memory that is not physically separated, and the ROM 312 area and the RAM 313 area may be provided by logical addresses. . In this case, for example, a specific area in the RAM may be write-inhibited to have a ROM function. The same applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 300 .

A ROM 312 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as a main storage device for the MPU 302 . The ROM 312 is a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply from the outside to retain stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written. This ROM 312 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses. has various areas. These areas are described in detail later.

A RAM 313 is a semiconductor memory in which information can be written and erased arbitrarily. The RAM 313 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when reading and executing the control program stored in the ROM 312, and does not require external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a volatile memory that This RAM 313 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses. have. These areas are described in detail later. In the present embodiment, the Volvual Memory such as DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) and SRAM (Static RANDOM ACCESSSSSSSSSSSMORY) is used as RAM313, but MRAM (RAM 313 is 313. Dusic memory such as MagnetoreSistive RANDOM ACCESSS MEMORY) may be used. In the present embodiment, the RAM 313 retains data even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off by being supplied with power for data storage and holding from the power supply/launch control board provided in the power supply/launch control device 243. It is configured.

The MPU 302 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the MPU 302 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 303 provided in the main controller 300 and a plurality of detection sensors 152-156. The output port of the MPU 302 is connected to the blackout monitoring board 303 , the payout control device 242 and the sound emission control device 400 . The sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 connected to the sound emission control device 400 will be described later in detail. Further, the output ports of the MPU 302 include an electric accessory drive unit 84b2 that opens and closes the opening/closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b, a variable winning drive unit 83c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 83b of the variable winning device 83, and a main display. 93 and the character object display unit 94 .

Here, the main control board 301 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 302 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 302 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 84b2 to open and close the opening/closing member 84b1. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 302 executes drive control of the variable prize winning driving section 83c to open and close the opening/closing door 83b of the variable prize winning device 83. FIG. Also, in each game round, the MPU 302 executes display control of the main display section 93 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the start ports 84a and 84b. Further, the MPU 302 executes display control of the character item display unit 94 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85 .

The blackout monitoring board 303 relays the main control board 301 and the power supply/launch control device 243 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 243. . The MPU 302 receives power (24 V DC) via the power outage monitoring board 303 . In addition, the MPU 302 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to the various prize winning ports 82 to 84b, the out port 87, and each through gate 85 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 152 to 156. FIG. The MPU 302 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b.

The payout control device 242 supplies the payout device 224 with a prize ball (a game ball obtained by winning a prize) or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player) based on a command (control instruction) transmitted from the main control device 300. Execute payout control to pay out the

The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Power supply / launch control device 243 is equipped with an AC-DC converter that generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 301 and the payout control device 242 etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, The generated operating power is supplied to each device. In addition, the power/launch control device 243 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power supply section for power failure supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 313 of the main controller 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

The power/shooting control device 243 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 110 to shoot a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 103 of the game board 81, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 33 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 103 toward the guide rail 103 . When the power supply/firing control device 243 and the predetermined firing conditions (when the firing handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the firing stop switch 41b is off), the solenoid to supply a drive signal (shooting permission signal) to shoot a game ball.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launching mechanism 110 of the pachinko machine 10 employs a method of launching game balls by linear expansion and contraction of a plunger type solenoid. The ball-striking hammer may operate to hit the game ball, or the ball-striking mallet supported at a different position may operate to hit the game ball with respect to the rotation of the motor. Specifically, in the method of hitting a game ball by a motor, the motor and the ball-striking mallet are supported at different positions, and the ball-striking mallet is operated by rotating a cam connected to the motor. A ball-striking mallet operated by a motor (cam) operates in the opposite direction due to the elasticity of a connected spring or the like to strike a game ball and launch it into a game area 104 of the game board 81 . In the method of hitting a game ball by a rotary solenoid, the game ball is hit by rotating the rotating shaft in response to a pulse from the power supply/shooting control device 243, and the game ball hits the game area 104 of the game board 81. fired. A ball-striking mallet directly connected to the rotating shaft of the rotary solenoid hits the game ball on the launch rail by rotating to the position where the game ball is supported, and the game ball is shot. After hitting the ball, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the ball hitting mallet rotates in the opposite direction due to the recoil of hitting the stopper and its own weight, and is stopped by the stopper at the position before operation. In the method of hitting a game ball by a plunger-type solenoid, a ball-striking mallet is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger-type solenoid, and a game ball is hit by linear reciprocating motion of the mallet. A game ball is fired to. In addition, there is a plunger-type solenoid that hits a game ball by compressing a spring by retracting the ball-striking mallet when energized, and pushing the ball-striking mallet forward by the elasticity of the spring. Either can be used.

Also, the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 110 may be either mechanical or magnetic. In the case of the mechanical type, the power of the motor that drives the ball-striking mallet is used to operate the ball feeding device. In the case of the mechanical type, since the driving source of the ball hitting mallet and the ball feeding device is the same, it is possible to supply game balls to the shooting rail one by one according to the timing of hitting the ball with a simple structure. is possible. In the case of the magnet type, apart from the operation of the ball-striking mallet, an independent solenoid operates the ball-feeding operation to supply ball-game balls onto the launch rail one by one. The magnet type is preferably employed when the game ball shooting mechanism 110 shoots game balls using a rotary solenoid or a plunger type solenoid.

The first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the rear pack unit open detector 289 are connected to the main control board 301 via a built-in relay board (not shown). The first monitoring device 250 , the second monitoring device 290 and the rear pack unit open detector 289 are powered by the main control board 301 to operate.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery. "Internal lottery" is a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the starting winning opening (first and second starting openings 84a, 84b) provided on the game board. It is a lottery to decide whether to transfer or not. As shown in FIG. 18, the MPU 302 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 302 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 302 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 93 and the symbol display device 91. Further, the MPU 302 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether the opening/closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b is to be opened. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 (see FIG. 18).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds (increments) 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching a predetermined maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area (see FIG. 18) provided as acquired information storage means in the RAM 313 at the timing. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area (see FIG. 18) of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 85. be.

The reserved ball storage area includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 302 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a. That is, the values are sequentially stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4 from the previously obtained values. Specifically, when the winning to the first starting port 84a occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 302 stores the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. to store

In this embodiment, since the reservation area Ra for the first result display section has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the first start opening 84a are reserved. there is In addition, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section has a storage area for writing the number of reservations, which is the number of sets of values of the reserved jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3. is provided. It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the first starting port 84a is not limited to four, and may be any number, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 302 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b. That is, the values are sequentially stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 from the previously acquired value. Specifically, when the winning to the second starting port 84b occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 302 stores the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. are stored chronologically.

In this embodiment, since the second result display holding area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the second start opening 84b are held. there is In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations, which is the number of sets of values of the reserved jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3. is provided. It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

The execution area AE displays the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 461 and 462. This is an area for moving.

Since the electric work holding area has four storage areas, up to four winning prizes of game balls to each through gate 85 are held. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with two through gates 85. Regardless of which through gate 85 is won, if one of the through gates 85 is won, the operator is transferred to the through gate 85. Winning of the game ball is suspended. It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to four and may be any number, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

<Description of each counter>
Next, details of each counter will be described.
<Electric accessory release counter C4>
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is stored in the RAM 313 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 85. Stored in the holding area. The MPU 302 conducts a lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) to determine whether or not to open the opening/closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area. Execute.

<Support Mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as support modes) in which the frequency of opening the opening/closing member 84b1 that allows the winning of game balls to the second starting port 84b is different. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state is relatively low, and a high frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state is relatively high. and

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5), but the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode. , the number of times the opening/closing member 84b1 is set to the open state is increased, and the opening time per time of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state is also longer when the power open state is won. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the closed state between each opening in one electric power opening state is shorter than the opening time per time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 94) is shortened.

In the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the second starting port 84b than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the first start opening 84a than the second start opening 84b. A state with a high probability of winning a prize at the starting port 84b is brought about. In addition, when the detection sensor 154b detects the winning of the second starting port 84b, a predetermined number (for example, two) of prize balls are paid out. The game can be played without reducing the number of balls.

Note that the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening/closing member 84b1 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 84b1 to the open state with the low frequency support mode. and relatively high. Also, the number of types of support modes is not limited to two types, and may be arbitrary, and may be, for example, three types or more.

<Jackpot random number counter>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . In addition, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI to determine the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears, using a random value. A jackpot lottery will be held according to the method. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 advances the random number from the initial value of 0 when the power is turned on. The value obtained from the value counter CINI becomes the initial value. Assuming that 100 is obtained as the initial value from the random number initial value counter CINI, the jackpot random number counter C1 counts 100, 101, 102 until it reaches 599, then returns to 0 and continues counting until it reaches 99. , the initial value is again obtained from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, the initial value is changed each time the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, so that the timing at which the specific random number appears does not appear to be periodic.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 84a, and the game ball enters the second start hole 84b. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing values of random numbers that win the jackpot. Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the values of the random numbers that are selected to generate the jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 provided as success/failure information group storage means, as shown in FIG. remembered.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning lotteries, a low-probability mode (hereinafter also referred to as normal state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high-probability mode (hereinafter also referred to as variable probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. have a mode. The success/failure table includes the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability (normal) success/failure information group) shown in FIG. (probable variation) use propriety information group). The MPU 302 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "big win win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result". Specifically, under the game state (normal state) in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to when the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot occurs, as shown in FIG. There are 2 values. In addition, under the game state (probability variable state) in which the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is one. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and the number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode should have a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. . The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 84a, and the game ball enters the second start hole 84b. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area, the MPU 302 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing values of random numbers related to allocation destinations of types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 20, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table storage area (see FIG. 16) of the ROM 312 provided as the allocation information group storage means. information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 20(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 20(b). ing.
The MPU 302 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display unit reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the first start port 84a It is a table that is referred to when a jackpot type lottery is performed. The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 20(a), includes "low-probability results (special distribution results for low-probability)", "small-round high-probability results (high-probability results for few-rounds)", A plurality of distribution results of "few rounds low probability result (low probability result corresponding to few rounds)" and "most favorable result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are assigned as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability result", "10 to 14 ” (Probability 1/6) is sorted into “Few Rounds High Probability Result”, “15-19” (Probability 1/6) is sorted into “Few Rounds Low Probability Result”, “20-29” (Probability 1/3 ) are sorted into the “best result”.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the second start port 84b It is a table that is referred to when a jackpot type lottery is performed. The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 20(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability result", "10 to 29 ' (probability 2/3) is sorted to 'best result'.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 83 in opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described. The "low-probability result" and "small-round low-probability result" are sorting results in which the success/failure lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. The "few-round high-probability result" and "best-favorable result" are sorting results in which the win-fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

“Few-round high-probability result” and “few-round low-probability result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times). The "most advantageous result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 83 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described later in detail.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. . The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 84a, and the game ball enters the second start hole 84b. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The MPU 302 compares the ready-to-win table and the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area when the win/loss lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal loss". , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-reach table is information on the value of the random number related to the generation of the ready-to-reach display, and is stored in the table storage area for to-reach of the ROM 312 (see FIG. 16).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 91 displays the same odd number (for example, "1. 1.1”) or a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, “2.2.2”) is stop-displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the symbol display device 91 displays the same even number (for example, "2 2 2”) is stop-displayed on the stop-symbol-effective line L. In addition, when the winning lottery results in "jackpot winning" and the sorting lottery is distributed to "small round high probability result" or "small round low probability result", the pattern display device 91, as a stop result, the same A combination of symbols having an even number (for example, "4.4.4") is stop-displayed on the stop-symbol effective line L. Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is "special loss" instead of "big win", the symbol display device 91 will not display a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result, but will display "normal loss" in the lottery. A special symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") having mutually different numbers that will not be selected in the case of "result" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "most advantageous result", "low probability result", "low probability result" in the distribution lottery) round high probability result” or “few round low probability result”), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed. ), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The mode of the ready-to-win display is a specific symbol display row (in this embodiment, the symbol display row Z1 and the symbol display row Z3) among the plurality of symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. , and the remaining symbol display row (in this embodiment, the symbol display row Z2) is variably displayed (ready-to-win display), so that the ready-to-win state (ready-to-win) is displayed. It is configured so that the player can recognize what has occurred. Specifically, the ready-to-win display is a combination of symbols in which the same decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display row Z1 and the symbol display row Z3. ” indicates that it is fluctuating). Further, the symbols of the specific symbol display rows (symbol display row Z1 and symbol display row Z3) forming the ready-to-win display are temporarily stopped, and the remaining symbol display rows (symbol display row Z2) are displayed with decorative symbols. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the decoration figures of all the symbol display rows are fixed and stop displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 generates the ready-to-win display, after the variable display is started on the pattern display device 91, and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the winning lottery results in a ``jackpot win'' and distribution. It is possible to make the player expect that the lottery is sorted into "low probability result", "best result", "few rounds low probability result" or "few rounds high probability result". Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and some of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

In this embodiment, the main control board 301 of the main controller 300 has a reach random number counter C3, and the MPU 302 stores the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 312 and the held ball storage area. A lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a reach indication by comparing the value of the reach random number counter C3. That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery as to whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is executed by the main controller 300. may be configured to be executed

<Expected performance>
Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 91 . The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 91 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. The ready-to-win display described above is also an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" and results in a "non-normal result", and the pachinko machine 10 has two types of ready-to-win display and advance notice display. It has a kind of expected performance. Since the reach display has already been explained, the advance notice display will be explained below.

<Notice display>
The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". Instead of facilitating the occurrence of effects, this advance notice display may facilitate the selection of effects with a low appearance rate, or may be combined. In the present embodiment, the lottery to determine whether to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 300, whereas the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 400. is executed.

As for the mode of the advance notice display, among the plurality of pattern display rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, all the pattern display rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, or some of the pattern rows are displayed. (for example, the symbol display row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol display rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed. It is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern display rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated. Then, the MPU 302 compares the fluctuation table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer, and determines the duration of display of the symbols on the main display unit 93 and the number of symbols on the symbol display device 91. determine the display duration. It should be noted that the variation table is information of random number values related to the display duration time, and is stored in the variation table storage area (see FIG. 16) of the ROM 312 as described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, random number generation is performed by the counter circuits (counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4) that are ICs for generating random numbers. ) can be counted at extremely high speed. In addition, in the case of soft random numbers, it is processed as part of the program control of the game machine, so it is a burden on the software in the limited memory space, but in the case of hard random numbers, the random numbers are generated by hardware. As a result, a random number having a count value several times as large as the soft random number can be generated without imposing a burden on the software.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 300>
The MPU 302 of the main control device 300 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, and main processing that starts when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below. In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 302 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 302 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S108, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 302 reads the states (detection states) of the plurality of detection sensors 152 to 156, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 313 as winning detection information. The MPU 302 determines that the detection sensors 152 to 154b provided in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 82, the first starting opening 84a, the second starting opening 84b and the big winning opening 83a detect the winning of the game ball. In this case, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls is set, and this set command is transmitted to the payout control device 242 . For example, when the MPU 302 determines that the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the variable winning device 83 has detected the winning of game balls, the MPU 302 transmits a prize ball command instructing the payout of 13 prize balls to the payout control device 242. do.
Also, in step S101, the MPU 302 reads signals (light reception signals) input from the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the rear pack unit open detector 289. FIG. The information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of the MPU 302 . In this case, the MPU 302 is provided with at least first to third registers, the signal information of the first monitoring device 250 is stored in the first register, and the signal information of the second monitoring device 290 is stored in the second register. The signal from the rear pack unit open detector 289 is stored in a register and held in a third register. This also applies to the following description of the registers of MPU 302 .

In step S102, front door frame open monitoring processing is executed. In the front door frame opening monitoring process, based on the input signal from the first monitoring device 250, a process related to monitoring the opening of the front door frame 14 is executed while power is being supplied from the external power source. The details of the front door frame open monitoring process will be described later.

In step S103, inner frame opening monitoring processing is executed. In the inner frame opening monitoring process, based on the input signal from the second monitoring device 290, processing related to monitoring the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, in other words, the inner frame 13 in a state where power is being supplied from the external power source. Execute. The details of the inner frame release monitoring process will be described later.

In step S104, back pack open detection processing is executed. In the back pack open detection process, based on the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289, the open detection process of the back pack unit 15 is executed in the state where power is being supplied from the external power supply. Specifically, it is determined whether the input signal (input voltage) from the rear pack unit open detector 289 is LOW or HIGH. In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes LOW, and when the back pack unit 15 is opened, the back pack The input signal from the unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH, but a different system may be used. For example, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH, and when the back pack unit 15 is opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH. may be LOW. When the opening of the back pack unit 15 is detected in step S104, the MPU 302 sets a back pack unit open command in the RAM 313. FIG. The back pack unit open command set in RAM 313 is transmitted from main controller 300 (MPU 302) to sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402).

In step S105, the MPU 302 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 302 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Note that the MPU 302 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 if the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S106, the MPU 302 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 302 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Note that the MPU 302 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 if the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto. Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops.

In step S107, the MPU 302 executes the winning process for through. Specifically, when the MPU 302 determines that the detection sensor 155 provided in each through gate 85 detects the winning of the game ball, the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 updated in step S106 is electric-powered. It is stored in the hand holding area. In addition, the MPU 302 sets a command for executing variable display of the symbols on the character object display unit 94, and displays on the character object display unit 94 the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of each through gate 85. Let In the character object display unit 94, based on the command instruction from the MPU 302, a variable display that blinks and turns on and off sequentially is performed. result) will display the normal map. Also, the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing lighting of the third suspension lamp unit 96 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 400 . Note that the sound emission control device 400 lights the third suspension lamp section 96 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 302 . The number of reserved game balls that have entered the through gate 85 is four at maximum, and the third reservation lamp part 96 lights up in the same number as the number of reserved balls.

In step S108, the MPU 302 executes a prize winning process for the start opening. The prize winning process for the start opening will be described in detail below.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the starting gate.
In step S201, the MPU 302 determines whether the game ball has entered the first starting hole 84a (start winning) based on whether the detection sensor 154a provided in the first starting hole 84a has detected the entry of the game ball. determine whether or not When the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has won the first starting port 84a in step S201 (YES), in step S202, grasps the reservation number stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra, The reserved number is set in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Ra for the first result display portion as the first start pending storage number RaN. Thereafter, the MPU 302 processes steps after step S205.

When the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has not won the first start port 84a in step S201 (NO), the MPU 302 detects that the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 154b provided in the second start port 84b in step S203. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 84b (start winning) based on whether or not the entry of the ball has been detected. When the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 84b in step S203 (NO), it ends the winning process for the starting hole. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the game ball has won the second starting port 84b in step S203 (YES), in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped. Then, the reserved number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion reserved area Rb as the second start reserved storage number RbN. Thereafter, the MPU 302 processes steps after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the start suspension memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not. When the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the number N of starting suspension memories is not less than the upper limit value (NO), it ends the winning process for the starting port. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value (YES), in step S206, 1 is added to the value of the start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN). Update.

In step S207, the MPU 302 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the empty storage area of the reservation area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, ie, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 302 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 The set is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 302 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, the MPU 302 sets the memory area corresponding to "4" of the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in 4 area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 302 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second result display portion pending area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 302 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 302 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to the memory area corresponding to "4" of the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in 4 area Rb4.

Also, in step S<b>207 , the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing lighting of the first suspension lamp section 95 a or the second suspension lamp section 95 b and transmits this set command to the sound emission control device 400 . After that, the MPU 302 terminates the winning process for the start opening. In addition, the sound emission control device 400 turns on the first reservation lamp section 95a or the second reservation lamp section 95b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 302 . Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b is four. Also, the number of the first reservation lamp units 95a or the second reservation lamp units 95b that is the same as (corresponding to) the number of reservations is lit.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. Normal processing is the main processing for progressing the game. Specifically, the MPU 302 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time is generated, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute. The "remaining time" is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time required for the processing of steps S301 to S309 from the cycle time (4 msec).

In step S301, the MPU 302 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting a command set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the sound emission control device 400 or the payout control device 242 Send to In addition, in the present embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether commands for effects such as commands corresponding to effects for the game cycle and commands corresponding to effects for the open/close execution mode are set. command is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S302, the MPU 302 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 302 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Note that the MPU 302 resets the value of the fluctuation type counter CS to 0 when the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S303, the MPU 302 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes a win/fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 91, and selects a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93. Determine related information, etc.

In step S304, the MPU 302 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes transition processing to each game state such as an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode. The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 302 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round is completed, and If it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . Sound emission control device 400 starts demonstration display execution processing based on a demonstration command transmitted from MPU 302 . This demonstration display execution processing will be described later in detail.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 3 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 302 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 3000 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). In addition, when the MPU 302 starts a new game cycle while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S306, the MPU 302 executes a process for controlling the opening/closing of the opening/closing member 84b1 provided in the second starting port 84b (hereinafter referred to as electric support process). Specifically, the MPU 302 executes the electric role product open lottery based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area of the RAM 313, and when the electric role product open lottery is won, The opening/closing process of the opening/closing member 84b1 is executed. In addition, the MPU 302 executes display control of the accessory display unit 94 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 302 executes game ball launch control processing. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes shooting control to cause the power supply/shooting control device 243 to shoot game balls based on the player's turning operation of the shooting handle 41 clockwise (right). Let More specifically, the power/shooting control device 243 excites the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) to cause the game ball shooting mechanism 110 to shoot a game ball. In addition, the solenoid is excited so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 41 . Specifically, the greater the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 41, the stronger the excitation, and the stronger the shooting intensity of the game ball. The power/shooting control device 243 shoots a game ball when predetermined shooting conditions (when the shooting handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the shooting stop switch 41b is off) are met. A drive signal is output to the solenoid of the mechanism 110 to shoot the game ball.

In step S<b>308 , the MPU 302 determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313 . A power failure flag is set in the RAM 313 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 303 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 302 . The power failure monitor board 303 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of a power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area such as the RAM 313, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 313 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 313 .

When the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308 (YES), the MPU 302 executes the power failure processing from step S312 onward without executing the processing from step S309 onward. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 302 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 302 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 313). In step S<b>314 , the MPU 302 prohibits access to the RAM 313 . After that, the MPU 302 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set (NO), in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, from when the current normal process is started. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 msec) has passed. If the MPU 302 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet reached (NO), that is, if the cycle time of 4 msec has not elapsed and a remaining time has occurred, in step S310 , the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311, the variation type counter CS is updated. Note that the MPU 302 repeats the processing of steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived (4 msec, which is the cycle time, has elapsed).

If the MPU 302 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process (YES), that is, if the cycle time of 4 msec has elapsed and there is no remaining time, step S301 is executed again. By doing so, the next normal processing is started.

<Main processing>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In step S401, the MPU 302 executes start-up processing upon power-on. This start-up process is provided with a waiting time for waiting for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 400) to become operable. Specifically, the MPU 302 waits until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses after the power is turned on.

In step S402, the MPU 302 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is a period for prohibiting access to the RAM 313 (hereinafter referred to as permission prohibition period), has elapsed. The MPU 302 repeats the process of step S402 until it determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed. That is, if the MPU 302 does not determine that 1 sec has elapsed in step S402, it repeats the processing of step S402, and if it determines that 1 sec has elapsed in step S402, it performs the processing from step S403 onward.

In this embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 302 counts the number of executions of the process of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S<b>403 , the MPU 302 permits access to the RAM 313 . In step S404, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/launch control device 243 is turned on. When the MPU 302 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404 (YES), it executes the processing from step S409. If the MPU 302 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on (NO), in step S405 it determines whether a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313 .

When the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405 (NO), it executes the processes after step S409. If the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405 (YES), it calculates a RAM determination value (checksum) in step S406. In step S407, the MPU 302 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 302 compares the RAM determination value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value (checksum) stored in step S313 (power failure processing) of normal processing. , and if they match, the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal (NO), that is, if it determines that the checksum values do not match, the MPU 302 executes the processing from step S409. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407 (YES), that is, when it determines that the checksum values match, in step S408, the power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313. clear the power failure flag.

In this embodiment, the checksum is used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313, but the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is determined by a method of checking the consistency of the checksum value. may be determined by a different method. For example, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 can be confirmed by writing a keyword in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 in the power failure processing and determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally. You may Alternatively, a CRC (cyclic redundancy check) or MD5 (hash function) hash value may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 . Note that the method of calculating the checksum is very simple, and for example, the lower one word of the total sum of the individual words in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. For this reason, the effectiveness of data confirmation by checksum is less reliable than other error detection codes, but the algorithm is very simple, so it does not burden the MPU 302 even in a limited memory space. can be calculated to

If the MPU 302 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404 (YES), determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405 (NO), or determines the RAM in step S407. If it is determined that the value is not normal (NO), the processing from step S409 is executed.

In step S<b>409 , MPU 302 outputs an audio lamp initialization command to audio emission control device 400 . As a result, initialization of RAM data and abnormality of data stored and held by the RAM judgment value are reported.
In step S410, the MPU 302 outputs a payout initialization command or the like in order to initialize the payout control board or the like that is the slave side control board.
At step S411, the MPU 302 clears the work area of the RAM 313, and at step S412, initializes (initializes) the RAM 313. FIG.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 313 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 313 even when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 303 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S412, the MPU 302 executes the opening monitoring process for power recovery. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes detection state comprehension processing in step S413. In the detection state comprehension processing, signals input from the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 are read in the same manner as the signal reading processing in step S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 21). The information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of the MPU 302 .

In step S414, a comparison process is executed. In the comparison process, the value of the signal of the first monitoring device 250 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312 . In the comparison process, the value of the signal of the second monitoring device 290 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312 .

In step S415, it is determined whether or not the signal value of the first monitoring device 250 compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value, and the signal value of the second monitoring device 290 exceeds the determination reference value. determine whether or not there is As a result, if both are equal to or greater than the judgment reference value, the process proceeds to step S417. If either one of them is smaller than the judgment reference value, it means that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened while the power is off, so the process proceeds to step S416.

In step S416, power recovery notification processing is executed. In the power recovery notification process, a power recovery notification command is output to the sound emission control device 400 . As a result, output of notification sounds from the speaker sections 26A to 26C, lighting of the error display lamp section 24, and notification display on the pattern display device 91 are performed. Note that these notification modes may be different from the notification modes based on the normal notification command. Further, in the sound emission control device 400, various notifications are continued until an operation for canceling the notification such as opening and closing of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is performed (when the operation for canceling the notification is performed, the main control unit 300 (MPU 302) A door open notification cancellation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402). In other words, not only the mode of notification but also the mode of cancellation of notification differs between the normal state and the time of power recovery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of notification and the mode of cancellation of notification may be the same during normal operation and during power recovery.

In addition, in the power recovery notification process, a power recovery notification signal is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall through the external terminal plate 213 . In this case, the hall computer stores identification information such as the date and time when the power recovery notification signal was input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and the monitoring cameras installed in the game hall are targeted. A process such as pointing to the pachinko machine 10 is executed.
When the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is operated to be opened while the power is cut off, the game hall manager or the like can be notified of this by executing the power recovery notification process. , if it is an unauthorized opening, it can be dealt with.

In addition, in the power recovery notification process, the information format of the power failure notification command or the power failure opening detection signal depends on whether the front door frame 14 has been opened or the inner frame 13 has been opened. can be different. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the power is cut off and when the inner frame 13 is opened while the power is cut off, the pachinko machine 10 itself or the hall computer can make different notification modes, It is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like deal with the problem appropriately. Further, the power recovery notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the power recovery notification command and the power recovery notification signal. In addition, as a process based on the output of the power recovery notification command, only a part of the output of the notification sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is performed. It may be configured to execute.

In step S417, the MPU 302 permits generation of timer interrupt processing. After that, the MPU 302 shifts to normal processing described with reference to FIG. As a result, the state before the power shutdown is restored.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In step S501, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 302 determines that it is in the opening/closing execution mode in step S501 (YES), it ends the game round control process without executing the process after step S502. In other words, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 302 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each start port 84a, 84b is detected.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313 . The same applies to each of the following steps. Further, the MPU 302 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (NO), in step S502, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the main display section 93 is performing variable display, that is, whether or not a game cycle is in progress. judge. When the MPU 302 determines in step S502 that the main display section 93 is not performing the variable display (NO), the MPU 302 executes the game cycle start processing in steps S503 to S505. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the main display section 93 is performing the variable display in step S502 (YES), it executes the game round progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

In step S503, the MPU 302 recognizes the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and recognizes the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb. is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 302 determines that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0" in step S503 (YES), it ends the game round control process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than "0" in step S503 (NO), in step S504, the A data setting process is executed for setting the stored hold information for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 302 causes the main display unit 93 and the pattern display device 91 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process. The data setting process in step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, and the variation start process in step S505 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S502, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the main display section 93 is performing variable display. If it is determined that the main display section 93 is performing variable display (YES), the game cycle progresses in steps S506 to S509. process.

In step S506, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 313 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed (NO), in step S507, the MPU 302 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 302 updates the display on the main display section 93 during variable display. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game round control process.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed (YES), in step S508, the MPU 302 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation ending process, the MPU 302 stores the information stored in the RAM 313 in any one of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 27), which will be described later. (information related to the pattern to be displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 302 executes display control of the main display section 93 so as to display the symbol corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 93 during the variable display.

Here, the symbol finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 93 when the game is finished. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated to behave in the same manner as when winning a lottery for generating a big win. can be done systematically.

The main display portion 93 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, and the symbols to be stop-displayed on the main display portion 93 are the pattern display columns Z1 to be stop-displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91. It is difficult for the player to recognize compared to ~Z3. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 instead of the main display section 93 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G increases.

In step S509, the MPU 302 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 302 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the normal processing. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game round control process. In addition, the sound emission control device 400 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 302 . Here, the sound emission control device 400 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variable end command.

<Data setting processing>
Next, the data setting process in step S504 of FIG. 25 will be described in detail. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In step S601, the MPU 302 determines that the second start hold storage number RbN in the second result display section hold area Rb set in step S204 of the start opening winning process (see FIG. 22) is "0" or less. It is determined whether or not. When the MPU 302 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the data for the first result display section (for the first start port 84a) in steps S602 to S606 When the setting process is executed and it is determined in step S601 that the second start suspension memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), for the second result display section (for the second start port 84b) in steps S607 to S611 data setting process.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start suspension storage number RaN in the first result display holding area Ra, and the first start holding stored in the first result display holding area Ra Update the value of the number of memories RaN. In step S603, the MPU 302 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display pending area Ra to the execution area AE.

In step S604, the MPU 302 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3. That is, in steps S603 and S604, the shift processing of the data stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

In step S<b>605 , the MPU 302 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 313 . This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 93, of the first result display section 93a and the second result display section 93b, is caused to start the variable display when completing a game cycle. is. In this step S605, the MPU 302 clears the second result display section flag, so when the game cycle is completed, the first result display section 93a changes based on the winning of the game ball into the first start port 84a. It indicates that the display should be started.

In step S606, the MPU 302 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift is voice emission control indicating that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 84a. It contains information for the device 400 to recognize.

Note that the sound emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp section 95a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 400 reduces the number of reserved game balls that have won the first start opening 84a, that is, the number of first start reserved memories stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra As the RaN decreases, the number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 95a is decreased.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S607, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN in the second result display hold area Rb, and the second start hold stored in the second result display hold area Rb. Update the value of the number of memories RbN. In step S608, the MPU 302 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb2 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.

In step S609, the MPU 302 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 shifts the pending information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3. In other words, in steps S608 and S609, the shift processing of the data stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is executed by the FIFO (First In First Out, FIFO) method.

In step S<b>610 , the MPU 302 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 313 . In this step S610, the MPU 302 sets the second result display section flag, so when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 93b changes based on the winning of the game ball into the second start port 84b. It indicates that the display should be started.

In step S611, the MPU 302 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift is voice emission control to indicate that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b. It contains information for the device 400 to recognize. Note that the sound emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 95b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 400 reduces the number of reserved game balls that have won the second start hole 84b, that is, the second start reserved storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb decreases, the number of lights of the second reservation lamp portion 95b is decreased.

As described above, in the data setting process in FIG. 26, the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section is set for the completion of the game cycle. ) data setting process (S602 to S606), and for the second result display section (for the second start port 84b) for setting the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb for completing the game cycle data setting processing (S607 to S611). When the MPU 302 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 302 sets data for the second result display section without executing the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the process. When the MPU 302 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 84a. irrespective of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra, the holding information stored in the second result holding holding area Rb is preferentially used for completing the game cycle. set to

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 of FIG. 25 will be described in detail. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In step S701, the MPU 302 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (NO), in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 19A) is retrieved from the win/fail table storage area of the ROM 312. read out. If the MPU 302 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode (YES), the MPU 302 stores the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 19B) in the win/fail table of the ROM 312 in step S703. Read from storage area.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 302 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 302, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, the success or failure table for the low probability mode read in step S702 or the success or failure table for the high probability mode read in step S703 The result of the winning lottery (winning result) is determined by comparing with. The success/fail result is one of "jackpot winning", "special failure result", and "normal failure result". ”, “Special Outlier Result”, and “Normal Outlier Result”.

In step S705, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning" (YES), it executes the processing from step S706 onwards, and if it determines that the win/loss result is not "jackpot winning" in step S705 ( NO), the process after step S712 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "big hit" (YES), in step S706 it determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 .

Here, when the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the first result display section 93a is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), in step S707 the first distribution table (see FIG. 20A) is stored in the ROM 312. read out from the sorting table storage area.

Further, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the second result display section 93b is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b. Therefore, if the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag has been set in the RAM 313 (YES), in step S708 the second distribution table (see FIG. 20B) is stored in the ROM 312. read out from the sorting table storage area.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU302 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 302 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 302 determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and determines the determined information. In other words, the RAM 313 is made to store information relating to symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 compares the sorting result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 312, and compares the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93. to decide. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 302 specifies that the sorting result is a “low probability result”, it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that it is a “small round high probability result”, a small number of rounds If the high probability result flag is set and it is specified as "few rounds low probability result", if the few rounds low probability result flag is set and it is specified as "most favorable result", the most favorable result flag to set. After that, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S716. In addition, in the processing of each step below, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of a flag set in the RAM 313 to determine the sorting result.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is not the "big win" (NO), it determines in step S712 whether the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special loss result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the “special outlier result” (YES), it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and determines in step S712 that the win/fail result is not the “special outlier result”. In the case (NO), the processing after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 302 determines information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, The RAM 313 is caused to store information, that is, information relating to symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 refers to a stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 312 to determine information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 . The mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the big win result. In step S714, the MPU 302 sets a special exclusion flag in the RAM313. In each of the following processes, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of the special loss flag set in the RAM 313 to determine whether the win/loss result is the "special loss result".

In step S715, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stopping result setting process for the out-of-ordinary result, the MPU 302 determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 313 . Here, the MPU 302 refers to a stop result table for out-of-normal results pre-stored in the ROM 312 to determine information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 . It should be noted that the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the normal winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 302 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S716. The processing for setting the display continuation time (display continuation period) will be described later in detail.

In step S717, the MPU 302 sets a variation command and a type command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 23). The sound emission control device 400 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302, and the processing will be described later in detail.

Note that the variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, but does not include information regarding whether or not the ready-to-reach display will occur. In addition, the type command includes information related to win/fail results and information related to sorting results. More specifically, the type command includes each piece of information related to "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. In addition, the type command includes each information related to "low probability result", "few round high probability result", "few round low probability result", and "best result" as information related to the sorting result. ing. In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are also collectively referred to as the game result. That is, the type command includes information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, and causes the main display section 93 to start variable display based on the determination result. Here, if the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, when the game cycle is completed, the first result display section 93a starts to display a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the first start port 84a. indicates that the

Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, it causes the first result display section 93a to start the variable display in step S718. Further, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, the second result display section 93b is made to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b when the game round is completed. It is shown that. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 causes the second result display section 93b to start variable display in step S718.

<Display duration setting processing>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a display duration setting process.
In step S<b>801 , the MPU 302 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 313 . Also, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 91 . Specifically, in step S802, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the sorting result determined in step S709 is the "special exclusion result".

In step S802, when the sorting result is not the "special failure result" (NO), in step S803, the MPU 302 determines whether the win/loss result determined in step S704 of FIG. 27 is the "normal failure result". If the MPU 302 determines in step S803 that the success/failure result is the "normal outlier result" (YES), in step S804, the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 312 and the reach random number stored in the reserved ball storage area A ready-to-win generation lottery is executed by comparison with the value of the counter C3.

In step S805, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs in the ready-to-win occurrence lottery in step S804. When the MPU 302 determines that the reach display occurs in step S805 (YES), in step S806, the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the ROM 312 is referred to. In addition, if the MPU 302 determines that the sorting result is the "special failure result" in step S802 (YES), if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "normal failure result" in step S803 (NO), or If it is determined in step S805 that the ready-to-win lottery is not won, in other words, no ready-to-win display occurs (NO), the non-to-win display duration table stored in the ROM 312 is referred to in step S807.

In step S808, the MPU 302 determines the display continuation time after executing the process of step S806 or step S807. Specifically, the MPU 302, based on the reach occurrence display duration table referred to in step S806 or the reach non-occurrence display duration table referred to in step S807, the variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer Determines the display duration corresponding to the value of Also, the MPU 302 sets the display duration time determined in step S807 to display duration counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 .

In this embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 in FIG. By comparing the value of the random number counter C3, a lottery as to whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is executed. can be configured to

Here, in the present embodiment, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. In other words, the display duration time when the pending information related to the first starting port 84a is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the first starting port 84a increases. Further, the display continuation time when the pending information related to the second starting port 84b is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the second starting port 84b increases. When the maximum value (four) of the reserved number is exceeded and the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b wins, the ball can be paid out, but the jackpot lottery cannot be received. However, as in the present embodiment, the display duration time is shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, and the game cycle is completed quickly, so that the state of winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls (payout of prize balls is received It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the player can win the lottery but cannot receive the lottery for the big win, thereby providing a game state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the reach non-occurrence display duration table, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display duration is set to be shorter than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, when the pending number is the same, the display continuation time in the high-frequency support mode is set shorter than the display continuation time in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the display duration table for reach occurrence and the display duration table for reach non-occurrence are set so that the display duration is different from each other.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are different. different from each other. Therefore, even if the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 400, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information regarding the display duration time. can be determined whether or not occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

In this embodiment, the display duration table for reach non-occurrence has a shorter display duration as the number of reservations increases, but the display duration increases as the number of reservations increases. The relationship may be reversed, and the display continuation time may be configured so as not to fluctuate (change) according to the number of pending items or the support mode. Also, the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be the same. In this case, regardless of whether reach occurs or not, the same display duration table is referred to determine the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer, and the various counters in the RAM 313 A display continuation time counter provided in the area may be set. Furthermore, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In step S901, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (NO), it executes the processing of steps S902 to S910. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processing of steps S911 to S914.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (NO), in step S902 it determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 93 has ended. When the MPU 302 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 93 has not ended (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display section 93 has ended (YES), in step S903 it determines whether or not the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. judge. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "big win win" or a "special loss result".

If the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (NO), that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result", the game state transition processing is executed. finish. If the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (YES), the MPU 302 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 313, and then in step S904 is a "special outlier result".

When the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is the “special loss result” (YES), in step S905, the MPU 302 sets “2” to the open/close counter SOC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83 in the MPU 302 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the MPU 302 determines that the success/failure result is not the "special loss result" in step S904 (NO), that is, when it determines that the success/failure result is the "jackpot winning", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether or not it is a round result (“few rounds high probability result” or “few rounds low probability result”).

When the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the result of allocation is the result of a small number of rounds (YES), in step S907 the MPU 302 sets the round counter RC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 to "2". Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not the few rounds result (NO), that is, when the MPU 302 determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result" or the "best result", step S908 , the round counter RC is set to "15". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 302 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening and closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The opening/closing number regulation mode ends on condition that the large winning opening 83a is opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening 83a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 83a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the big winning hole 83a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 83b to the open state, and then satisfies one of the following two conditions (1) and (2), so that the opening/closing door 83b is satisfied. to the closed state again.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 83a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After the MPU 302 executes any one of steps S905, S907, and S908, in step S909, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 is set to " 1000”. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. In addition, the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning design (special design).

Thus, when the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 302 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. . In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S910, the MPU 302 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game state transition processing. Here, the opening command includes the information of the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the MPU 302 sets in step S910 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 23). An opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 400 . Note that the sound emission control device 400 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode (YES), in step S911, the MPU 302 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening at step S911 will be described later in detail.

In step S912, the MPU 302, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S911, checks whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. If the MPU 302 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0" (YES), the value of the timer counter T is set to "0" in step S913. Determine whether or not:

When the MPU 302 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. If the MPU 302 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), in step S914, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313, the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Execute transition processing at the end of the mode. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game state transition processing.

Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S911 of FIG. 29 will be described in detail.
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In step S1001, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the big winning opening 83a is open. When the MPU 302 determines that the large winning opening 83a is not open in step S1001 (NO), it executes the processing after step S1002. Also, when the MPU 302 determines that the big winning opening 83a is open in step S1001 (YES), it executes the processing from step S1006.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 83a is not open (NO), in step S1002, the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less, and the value of the round counter RC is "0". Determine whether or not: When the MPU 302 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), in step S1003, the value of the timer counter T is set to "0". ” or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" at step S1003 (YES), at step S1004, the MPU 302 executes a special winning opening opening process. It should be noted that the special prize opening opening process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In step S1005, the MPU 302 sets an open command. Also, the MPU 302 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 23). After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 302, the sound emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening/closing door 83b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), in step S1006, it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, that is, whether the large winning opening is open. It is determined whether or not the upper limit continuous time set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the process (see FIG. 31) has elapsed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), in step S1007 it determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the large winning opening 83a.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 83a (YES), in step S1008, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. If the MPU 302 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is less than or equal to "0" (YES), in step S1010, the MPU 302 executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 302 sets the open/close door 83b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 83c.

In step S1011, the MPU 302 sets a closing command. The MPU 302 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 23). Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 302, the sound emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening/closing door 83b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1012, the MPU 302 determines whether the hit/fail result is a "special loss result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the “special loss result” (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1018, which will be described later.

Moreover, when the MPU 302 determines that the win/fail result is not the “special loss result” in step S1012 (NO), it executes the processing from step S1013 onward. In step S1013, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it. Also, in step S1014, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is set to the open standby state from when the open/close door 83b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again until the open/close door 83b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In this embodiment, the waiting time for opening is set to 1 second, but the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode and the progress.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processing from step S1016. In step S1016, the MPU 302 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning design (special design).

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 302 sets an ending command. The MPU 302 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 23). After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the sound emission control device 400 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes predetermined processing.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1010 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the win/fail result is the “special losing result” in step S1012 (YES), in step S1018, the value of the open/close counter SOC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1019, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it executes the processes after step S1015 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processes after S1016 described above.

Next, the special winning opening opening process in step S1004 of FIG. 30 will be described in detail.
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In step S<b>1101 , the MPU 302 sets “8” to winning counters PC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . In step S1102, the MPU 302 determines whether the hit/fail result is a "special loss result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1102 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result" (YES), it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103. As described above, the MPU 302 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result" in step S1102 (NO), it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1104. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1103 or step S1104, the MPU 302 executes processing for opening the big winning opening 83a in step S1105. In this opening execution process, the MPU 302 sets the open/close door 83b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 83c. After that, the MPU 302 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 83a. Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1104 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 83b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 302 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 302 sets a long-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 110 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, the MPU 302 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 83a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8". Therefore, the upper limit duration time (30 sec) of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 83a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit is 8. It is easy to let the game ball win the big winning hole 83a. On the other hand, since the upper limit duration (0.17 sec) of the short-time mode is shorter than the shooting period of the game ball, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 83a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one or two game balls into the big winning hole 83a.

Next, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S914 of FIG. 29 will be described in detail.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In step S1201, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "best result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "best result" (YES), in step S1202, the MPU 302 sets the high-frequency support flag to the RAM 313 . If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S<b>1203 , the MPU 302 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 313 .
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big hit" is won in the lottery if the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

In step S<b>1204 , the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 313 . If the high-probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning/failing lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 302 sets the flags (low-probability result flag, high-probability result flag for few rounds, high-probability result flag for few rounds, low-probability result flag , and best result flags) and special outlier flags. Further, in step S701 of the above-described fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 27), the MPU 302 determines whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 313, thereby determining whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. It is determined whether

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "best result" (NO), in step S1205 it determines whether the distribution result is the "few rounds high probability result". . When the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is the “low-round high-probability result” (YES), in step S1206, the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 . If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S<b>1207 , the MPU 302 sets “100” to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . In step S<b>1208 , the MPU 302 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 313 . The MPU 302 maintains the count limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313 .

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. Note that the MPU 302 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 23), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In step S<b>1209 , the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 313 . If the high-probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning/failing lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not the "few rounds high probability result" (NO), in step S1210, the MPU 302 determines whether the distribution result is the "few rounds low probability result". judge. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1210 that the sorting result is the “small round low probability result” (YES), in step S1211 the high probability mode flag is cleared. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is obtained in the win-or-fail lottery and the sorting result is anything other than a "small round low-probability result" or a "low-probability result".

In step S<b>1212 , the MPU 302 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 313 . If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In step S<b>1213 , the MPU 302 sets “100” to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . In step S<b>1214 , the MPU 302 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 313 . The MPU 302 maintains the count limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313 . After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. Note that the MPU 302 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 23), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1210 that the sorting result is not the "small round low probability result" (NO), it determines whether the sorting result is the "low probability result" in step S1215.

If the MPU 302 determines in step S1215 that the sorting result is not the "low probability result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the success/failure result is the "special failure result", the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode exit.
Moreover, when MPU302 determines with a distribution result being a "low probability result" in step S1215 (YES), in step S1216, it clears a high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the sorting result becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "few-round high-probability result".

In step S<b>1217 , the MPU 302 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 313 . If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In step S<b>1218 , the MPU 302 sets “100” to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 . In step S<b>1219 , the MPU 302 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 313 . The MPU 302 maintains the count limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313 . After that, the MPU 302 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. Note that the MPU 302 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 23), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the allocation result in the distribution lottery is the "most advantageous result" or the "small round high probability result", the game state changes to the current game state. Regardless, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Here, when the distribution result is the "best result" in the distribution lottery, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery. In addition, if the distribution result in the distribution lottery is a "small round high probability result", the high probability mode continues at least until it becomes a "jackpot winning" in the success or failure lottery, and the high frequency support mode is the specified number of times (100 times).

Also, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is a "low probability result" or a "small round low probability result", the game state will be regardless of the current game state. After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support when 100 game rounds are completed without "jackpot win" in the lottery. mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Next, the front door frame opening monitoring process in step S102 in FIG. 21 will be described using the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the front door frame open monitoring process.

In the front door frame opening monitoring process, first, a comparison process is executed in step S1301. In the comparison process, the detection state information (light receiving signal) stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the signal reading process is compared with the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312 . In subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the value of the signal compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value.

If the value of the signal is smaller than the determination reference value in step S1302 (NO), it means that the front door frame 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 13 . When the value of the signal is less than the determination reference value in this way, in order to notify that the front door frame 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 13 while power is being supplied from the external power supply, In step S1303, a notification process for normal time is executed.

In the normal time notification process, a normal time notification command is set. This set normal time notification command is output to the sound emission control device 400 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 23). The sound emission control device 400 causes the speaker sections 26A to 26C to output notification sounds, turns on the error display lamp section 24, and further causes the pattern display device 91 to perform notification display. In the sound emission control device 400, various notifications are continued until a notification cancellation operation is performed such that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened or closed (when the notification cancellation operation is performed, a door open notification cancellation command is transmitted to the MPU 402). ). Note that the sound emission control device 400 may stop the various notifications after continuing the above-described various notifications for a predetermined notification time (notification period). For example, 10 seconds can be considered as this notification time.

Also, in the normal time notification process, a normal time notification signal is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall via the external terminal plate 213 . In this case, the hall computer stores identification information such as the date and time when the normal time notification signal was input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and the pachinko machine for the surveillance camera installed in the game hall. A process such as pointing to the machine 10 is executed.

In a situation where electric power is being supplied from an external power supply, if the above-described normal notification processing is executed at the timing when the front door frame 14 is opened, not at the timing when the front door frame 14 is closed. It is possible to have the manager of the game hall deal with the unauthorized opening of the front door frame 14. - 特許庁

Note that the normal time notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the normal time notification command and the normal time notification signal. In addition, as processing based on the output of the normal time notification command, output of notification sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C, lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or part of the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. After the normal notification processing is executed in step S1303, the front door frame open monitoring processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the signal is equal to or greater than the determination reference value in step S1302 (YES), it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the normal time notification command has already been set.
In step S1304, if the normal notification command has already been set (YES), notification cancellation processing is executed in step S1305.
If the value of the signal is equal to or greater than the criterion value in step S1302, it means that the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13. Also, if the normal time notification command has already been set in step S1304, it means that notification is being performed. In this way, when the signal value is equal to or greater than the determination reference value and the normal time notification command has already been set, the front door frame 14 is moved to the inner frame 13 while power is being supplied from the external power supply. On the other hand, since it means that the closing operation (notification cancellation operation) has been performed, notification cancellation processing is executed in step S1305.

In step S1306, the set normal time notification command is canceled, in other words, the flag of the normal time notification command is cleared (set to 0).
Note that in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21), after the front door frame open monitoring process is executed in step S102, the second monitoring device 290 in a state where power is being supplied from the external power supply is performed in step S103. As monitoring processing of the inner frame 13 via the inner frame opening monitoring processing and opening detection of the back pack unit 15 via the back pack unit open detector 289 are executed.

In the inner frame open monitoring process, when the information (light reception signal) of the detection state of the second monitoring device 290 grasped in the signal reading process is smaller than the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312, the normal time notification Execute processing and update detection status information. Further, when the detection state information (light receiving signal) of the second monitoring device 290 grasped by the signal reading process is equal to or higher than the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312, the normal time notification command has already been set. If the normal time notification command has already been set, notification cancellation processing is performed. The specific processing configuration is the same as that of the front door frame opening monitoring processing, and redundant description will be omitted. In the open detection of the back pack unit 15, based on the output signal (High or Low) from the back pack unit open detector 289, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is opened.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 400 and Display Control Device 500>
FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device. As shown in FIG. 34, the sound emission control device 400 includes a sound emission control board 401, an MPU 402 mounted on the sound emission control board 401, and a ROM 412 and a RAM 413 that constitute the MPU 402. Here, the MPU 402 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 412 and the RAM 413 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 412 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing data, as a read-only memory. The ROM 412 has a plurality of areas logically separated by logical addresses, and each area stores fixed value data used when executing various control programs and processes according to the programs. ing. The MPU 402 controls execution of effects based on instructions from the main controller 300 by executing processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 412 . Since the ROM 412 is chipped with the CPU and connected via an internal bus, it is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity, and specifically, its data capacity is 2 Mbytes.

The RAM 413 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply to hold data (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing. , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 412 when the data capacity is compared. The RAM 413 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas, for example. The RAM 413 temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 412 . Note that it is not essential that the ROM 412 and the RAM 413 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 402, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The sound emission control board 401 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the sound emission control board 401 is connected to the main controller 300 . Also, the input port of the sound emission control board 401 is connected to the operation button 35 . The output port of the sound emission control board 401 is connected to the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error display lamp section 24, the first to third reservation lamp sections 95a to 96, the speaker sections 26A to 26C, the display control device 500, and the like. there is The MPU 402 controls the driving of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error display lamp section 24, the first to third reservation lamp sections 95a to 96, the speaker sections 26A to 26C, etc., based on commands transmitted from the main control device 300. to run. Also, the MPU 402 analyzes a command transmitted from the main control device 300 to determine the contents of the effect in a predetermined period, and transmits a command according to the determined content of the effect to the display control device 500 . A signal path provided to connect the MPU 402 and the MPU 502 is used for this command transmission. The sound emission control device 400 is electrically connected to the display control device 500 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness having connectors at both ends of a signal line.

MPU402 performs the light emission control of not only the display control apparatus 500 but the display lamp apparatuses 23A and 23B, when the content of the production|presentation in a predetermined period is determined. In this case, although FIG. 34 shows that the sound emission control board 401 and the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are directly connected, the present invention is not limited to this. A relay substrate may be interposed between the lamp devices 23A and 23B.

When the MPU 402 determines the content of the presentation during the predetermined period, the MPU 402 executes drive control of the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 and common ROM 404 are used for drive control of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The common ROM 404 is configured to read-only use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for memory retention, such as a NOR-type flash memory or a NAND-type flash memory. Since the common ROM 404 is not directly connected to the MPU 402 but externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, it is easier to increase its data capacity than the ROM 412. Specifically, its data capacity is 1 Gbyte. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 Mbytes or 4 Gbytes.

The sound output LSI 403 includes an I/F 403a, a register 403b, a sound data processing section 403c, a DAC 403d, and a data transfer section 403e. The sound output LSI 403 executes control for outputting sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C according to data transmitted from the MPU 402. FIG.

The I/F 403a is an interface for the sound output LSI 403 to communicate with the MPU 402 via a bus B1 provided as a signal path group for two-way communication. A bus B1 connected to the I/F 403a is composed of eight signal paths, and data is transmitted and received between the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 via each signal path.

The register 403b has a function as storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 403, and is used for both reading and writing of a memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data. is configured to In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 .

The register 403b has a data capacity of many bytes so that it can store a plurality of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

The sound data processing unit 403c converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the MPU 402 and stored in the register 403b so that they can be used for outputting sound, and outputs the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 404. It has a function of creating digital musical sound data using the read sound data. The sequence data includes time data that indicates the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that defines the pitch, volume, and timbre of sounds at a predetermined timing. there is

The sound data processing unit 403c has a function of a plurality of sound generation channels so that a plurality of different sounds can be output at the same time. has a function to create Although 16 channels are provided as a plurality of tone generation channels, the number of channels is arbitrary. Also, by using virtual tracks, it is possible to use a larger number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) than the actual number of sound generating channels, but a configuration that does not use virtual tracks is also possible.

The DAC 403d is a digital/analog converter and includes an analog signal amplifier circuit. The DAC 403d has a function of amplifying an analog audio signal obtained by converting the digital musical tone data or the digital synthesized musical tone data created by the sound data processing section 403c into an analog signal and outputting the amplified analog audio signal to the speaker sections 26A to 26C.

The data transfer unit 403e is connected to the common ROM 404 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring data read from the common ROM 404 to the register 403b. ing. A bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 403e and the common ROM 404 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of signal paths is greater than that of the bus B1 between the MPU 402 and the I/F 403a. number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 403e and the common ROM 404 is faster than the data communication speed between the MPU 402 and the I/F 403a. The data transfer unit 403e reads sound data necessary for sound output from the common ROM 404 based on the data converted from the sequence data and the parameter data in the sound data processing unit 403c, and stores it in the register 403b.

Here, the data transfer unit 403e not only has a function of transferring sound data required by the sound data processing unit 403c to the register 403b, but also reads data required by the MPU 402 from the common ROM 404 and stores it in the register 403b. It has a function of transferring the data stored in the register 403 b to the MPU 402 . A configuration related to data transfer will be described below.

<Data structure of ROM 412 and common ROM 404>
First, the data configurations of the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the ROM 412, and FIG. 35(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the common ROM 404. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), the ROM 412 stores a program and processing data (1) for executing the processing for effect control and abnormality notification in the MPU 402, a program and processing data (2), . . , programs and processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include data tables used for executing each effect, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 403 . Programs and data for processing necessary for executing processing for effect control in the MPU 402 are all stored in the ROM 412 . The program and processing data for executing the abnormality notification process are the program and processing data used in the power recovery notification process in FIG. 24 and the normal notification process in FIG. It is different from the program and processing data that Therefore, the sound data described later is reproduced in different manners in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time.

The ROM 412 stores not only the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2), . Light emission data (1), light emission data (2), . In each of these light emission data, information on the type of light emitting portion to be turned on among the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the lighting period, and the lighting order is set for a predetermined effect period. The content differs depending on the type of each light emission data. Each light emission data stored in the ROM 412 has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the common ROM 404 stores sound data (1), sound data (2), . , sound data (S) are stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes waveform data obtained by sampling melodies and sounds actually produced by musical instruments corresponding to various timbres, and melodies with lyrics are produced by musical instruments corresponding to various timbres. It contains waveform data obtained by sampling the voice in addition to the melody. All sound data are stored in the common ROM 404 . Note that the sound data stored in the common ROM 404 includes music (BGM) and sound data (music data and voice data) used in productions A to D shown in FIG. 24 and the normal notification processing of FIG. For example, "The door is open!", or "The door is closed!" when returning from opening the door), the first mode M1 to M1 in FIG. Sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voice used in the production of the fifth mode M5, Sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voice used in the production MA to MC of the fourth mode in FIG. music data and voice data), etc.

Sound data is digital signal data obtained by converting an analog signal into a pulse train with a predetermined sampling frequency and a predetermined number of quantized signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantized signals is 16 bits. Therefore, the sound waveform data composed of analog signals for 1 sec has a data amount of 1*44.1 k*16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling period T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

The sound data is set so as to be readable from the common ROM 404 for each pulse-code-modulated data for one pulse, that is, data for one sample. That is, an address is set for each data of one sample, and the data transfer unit 403e of the sound output LSI 403 can transfer data from the common ROM 404 in units of data of one sample.

The sampling frequency is not limited to 44.1 kHz, and may be 32 kHz, 48 kHz, or 96 kHz, for example, as long as good sampling can be achieved. Also, the number of quantized signals is not limited to 16 bits, and any number of bits other than 16 bits may be used as long as good quantization can be achieved.

The common ROM 404 stores not only sound data (1), sound data (2), . (R) is stored in advance. Here, the light emission data stored in the common ROM 404 includes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 used in the notification process for power recovery in FIG. 24 and the notification process for normal time in FIG. It contains light emission data used to control the light emission of the Each of these light emission data has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern.

Here, the light emission patterns of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are different between the power recovery notification process (step S416) in FIG. 24 and the normal notification process (step S1303) in FIG. Specifically, in the notification process for power recovery, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 emit light, while in the notification process for normal time, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 The light emission data is defined so that the light does not emit light. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the normal time notification process, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light, in other words, they are turned off. The emission data are defined as follows.

In the present embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery in FIG. 24 and the notification process for normal time in FIG. is open, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light. In the normal notification processing, a light bulb in which light emitting elements such as LEDs (light emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are enclosed in a glass spherical shell so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the supply of power for light emission to a light emitter such as the light emitter is stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and for the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat will lose the exhilaration and immersion feeling and lose interest in the game. In addition, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the display lamp device 23A, 23B on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is configured not to emit light. You may In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification processing may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. The supply of power for light emission to a light-emitting body such as a light bulb in which light-emitting elements such as LEDs (light-emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements of the display lamp device on the open side are sealed in a glass spherical shell may be stopped.

The light emission data used by the MPU 402 as described above is stored not only in the ROM 412 directly connected to the MPU 402 via a bus, but also in the common ROM 404 connected to the sound output LSI 403 . In other words, the light emission data is distributed and stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 .

By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404 in this manner, the data capacity of the light emission data can be increased without increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 412 . In particular, since the ROM 412 is connected via the internal bus within the MPU 402, it is relatively difficult to increase the data capacity of the ROM 412. Then, it becomes necessary to expand the internal bus width, and it is not easy to deal with it. On the other hand, as already explained, the common ROM 404 is not directly connected to the MPU 402, but externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, resulting in an increased data capacity. is relatively easy. By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404, it is possible to cope with an increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

Also, basically, when data is set in the ROM, about several percent (for example, about 2%) of the total data capacity is blank (unused area). In this case, assuming that the data capacity of the common ROM 404 is 1 Gbytes, the blank is 20 Mbytes. This data capacity is larger than the 2 Mbyte data capacity of the ROM 412 . According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data using such a blank.

Furthermore, since the sound data corresponds to melodies and voices for a predetermined period, the data capacity for performing a series of outputs is relatively large. As a result, it becomes difficult to adapt the data capacity of the sound data, and from this point, blanks are likely to occur in the common ROM 404 . Then, according to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data using such a blank.

The light emission data stored in the common ROM 404 is used by the MPU 402. When the MPU 402 needs to use the light emission data, it is shared by the sound output LSI 403 according to a transfer instruction from the MPU 402. Light emission data is read from the ROM 404 and the read light emission data is transferred to the MPU 402 . For this transfer, the bus B1 connecting the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 is used. That is, the light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 404 is transferred to the MPU 402 using a signal path for data transfer from the MPU 402 to the sound output LSI 403 or from the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402 . As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which a ROM separate from the ROM 412 is externally attached to the MPU 402 and the redundant light emission data is stored in the ROM, the redundant light emission data can be obtained without increasing the number of signal paths. can be stored.

Of the programs and processing data used by the MPU 402 and the light emission data, all of the programs and processing data are stored in the ROM 412, and part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute data satisfactorily. In other words, if the program and processing data are distributed to the common ROM 404, a separate program and processing data are required to transfer the program and processing data to the RAM 413 of the MPU 402, which complicates the design of the program. become something. On the other hand, for the light emission data, the address where the light emission data is originally stored is grasped, the light emission data is read based on the address, transferred, and developed so that it can be used. Therefore, even if the light emission data are distributed, the design of the program is unlikely to become complicated.

Further, when a production-related command is transmitted from the main controller 300, the MPU 402 first executes a predetermined process corresponding to the command using a program, and uses light emission data in the process of executing the predetermined process. to control the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. In other words, the program needs to be read abruptly in response to the reception of a command from the main controller 300, and the read timing is highly arbitrary. Read timing is less arbitrary. In addition, since the light emission data is used on the premise that a predetermined process using the program is executed, the readout priority is higher for the program, and if the readout of the program is delayed, the process waits. Under such circumstances, the program is stored in the ROM 412, and at least part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404, so that the program can be independently read by the MPU 402 regardless of the state of the sound output LSI 403. , it is possible to increase the data amount of the light emission data, which tends to be large compared to the program.

Furthermore, instead of storing all the light emission data in the common ROM 404, a part of the light emission data is stored in the ROM 412 and the rest is stored in the common ROM 404. Therefore, the data capacity of the common ROM 404 is reduced. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an extreme increase.

<Configuration of register 403b of sound output LSI 403>
Next, see FIG. 36 for the configuration of the register 403b used to instruct the sound output LSI 403 to output sound from the MPU 402 and to transfer the sound data stored in the common ROM 404 from the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402. I will explain while FIG. 36 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of register 403b.

As shown in FIG. 36, the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403 contains areas 9523a to 9523e in which data is set when the MPU 402 issues a sound output instruction to the sound output LSI 403, and data transfer instructions from the MPU 402. buffers 9524a to 9524e for temporarily storing and holding data read from the common ROM 404; A flag area 9526 for recognizing the internal state of the output LSI 403 in the MPU 402 is separately provided.

In detail, the above areas 9523a to 9526 will be described as areas in which data setting is performed when a sound output instruction is performed. and a fourth parameter area 9523d. In addition, an area 9523e for sequence data is provided.

Areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters store parameter data necessary for outputting melodies and sound effects, and parameter data necessary for outputting voices. Since a plurality of areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters are provided in this manner, a plurality of sounds can be produced simultaneously. Further, the already explained sequence data is stored in the sequence data area 9523e.

Incidentally, since the sound output LSI 403 has functions for 16 channels, parameter data for a plurality of (specifically, four) channels are stored in one parameter area. Also, in a configuration using virtual tracks, a larger number of parameters may be stored in one parameter area.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area in which data is set when the MPU 402 issues a data transfer instruction to the sound output LSI 403 . The transfer instruction area 9525 stores the address data of the light emission data required in the MPU 402 and also stores the data instructing the transfer of the light emission data read from the common ROM 404 to the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402 . .

A plurality of buffers 9524 a to 9524 e for external reading are provided as areas for temporarily storing and holding data read from the common ROM 404 based on data transfer instructions from the MPU 402 . The light emission data necessary for the MPU 402 is temporarily stored in external readout buffers 9524a to 9524e, and transferred to the MPU 402 at a predetermined readout timing.

A flag area 9526 is provided as an area for the MPU 402 to recognize the internal state of the sound output LSI 403 . As the flag area 9526, for example, a read completion flag is provided. , "1" is stored in the read completion flag, and the MPU 402 recognizes this fact.

The areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are all accessible from the MPU 402, but the areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are accessed simultaneously. Instead, the accessible target is switched. In other words, the number of areas that can be accessed simultaneously in MPU 402 corresponds to the number of first to eighth signal paths (eight in this embodiment) forming bus B1 between MPU 402 and sound output LSI 403. there is

Specifically, an area 9523a for a first parameter and a buffer 9524a for external reading of 1 are allocated as a first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path forming the bus B1. As a second area 9521b corresponding to the second signal path, an area 9523b for the second parameter and a buffer 9524b for external reading of 1 are allocated, and the third area corresponding to the third signal path forming the bus B1. An area 9523c for the third parameter and a buffer 9524c for external reading of 1 are allocated as 9521c, and an area 9523d for the fourth parameter is allocated as the fourth area 9521d corresponding to the fourth signal path forming the bus B1. and 1 buffers 9524d for external reading. An area 9523e for sequence data and a buffer 9524e for external reading of 1 are allocated as a fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path forming the bus B1.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is allocated as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path forming the bus B1, and a flag area 9526 is allocated as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path forming the bus B1. .

For the register 403b, selectors 9522a-9522e are provided corresponding to the first area 9521a-fifth area 9521e, respectively. Accessible areas are switchable. This switching is performed through binary switching to the selector area 9527 provided in the register 403b corresponding to the eighth signal path forming the bus B1.

Specifically, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value “0”, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are controlled for sound output by setting the area to be accessed by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to the areas 9523a to 9523e for . That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value, the MPU 402 can access the area 9523a to 9523d for each parameter and the area 9523e for the sequence data, and the sound output LSI 403 It becomes possible to issue an output instruction for That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in the first state of interference with the MPU 402 .

When the information in the selector area 9527 is "1", which is the switching execution value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are set to the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e, and the external reading buffer 9524a is set. ∼9524e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value, the MPU 402 can access the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and can read the data for which the transfer instruction has been issued. becomes. That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in a second interference state with respect to the MPU 402 .

On the other hand, the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526 and the selector area 9527 are not switched by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. Therefore, the MPU 402 can access the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 regardless of the interference state of the sound output LSI 403. FIG.

The display control device 500 includes a display control board 501 , an MPU 502 , a program ROM 512 and a work RAM 513 that constitute the MPU 502 , a video display processor (VDP) 505 , a character ROM 506 and a video RAM 507 . Here, the MPU 502 is an element in which a program ROM 512, a work RAM 513, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. The MPU 502 , VDP 505 , character ROM 506 and video RAM 507 are mounted on the display control board 501 .

The MPU 502 controls the VDP 505 based on commands sent from the sound emission control device 400 . Specifically, the MPU 502 analyzes a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 and controls the VDP 505 by generating a command for the VDP 505 based on the analysis result.

The program ROM 512 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, is a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information, and cannot be written. It is a semiconductor device. This program ROM 512 has various areas such as various data storage areas. These areas are described in detail later.

The work RAM 513 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 512. The work RAM 513 is a volatile RAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. memory. The work RAM 513 has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas. These areas are described in detail later. In this embodiment, a volatile memory such as a DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 513, but a nonvolatile memory such as an MRAM may be used.

The VDP 505 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 91 . Since the VDP 505 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 505 reads image data from the character ROM 506 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 502 and stores the image data in the video RAM 507 .

The character ROM 506 pre-stores various image data (image information) including sprite data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the pattern display device 91, background data, and moving image data, and functions as an image data library. The character ROM 506 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. The video RAM 507 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 91 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 91 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 507 .

Returning to the description of the sound emission control device 400, the MPU 402 receives the variation command transmitted from the main control device 300, recognizes that it is necessary to start the game round effect, and starts the game round effect. Execute start processing. Further, by receiving an end command transmitted from the main control device 300, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the end processing for the effect for the game round. Also, by receiving various commands for the big win performance transmitted from the main controller 300, it recognizes that the big win performance needs to be started or progressed, and executes the big win performance processing. Also, by receiving a demonstration display command transmitted from main controller 300, it recognizes that it is necessary to start demonstration display, and executes demonstration display processing. Note that the MPU 402 is not limited to receiving commands directly from the main controller 300 for receiving commands from the main controller 300, but may be configured to receive commands relayed by a relay board. .

In the game round effect start processing, based on both the variation command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game round and the presence or absence of the ready-to-win display are grasped. a reach display comprehending process, a big win result occurrence comprehending process for comprehending the presence or absence of a big win result, and a jackpot type comprehending process for comprehending the big win type when a big win result occurs are executed. Also, based on the results of the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 in this game round. Along with executing the comprehension process, a symbol type comprehension process for determining the type of symbol to be finally displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 in this game round is executed. Then, based on the results of these grasping processes, the display control device 500 outputs a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be displayed in the final stop. Send to

In addition, in the game round effect start process, in addition to the above grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery for the advance notice display is also executed. Then, if it is determined that the announcement display is generated and won, an announcement command including information on the type of announcement display is transmitted to the display control device 500 . In addition, in the game round production start process, based on the processing results of the above processes, light emission data for the game round (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for the game round (sequence data and parameter data are combined). ) are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 to define the light emission mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the game round effect end processing, the light emission control of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound output control of the speaker units 26A to 26C in the current game round are ended. In addition, in the game round effect end processing, an end command including information for ending the game round effect is transmitted to the display control device 500 . In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for the jackpot effect, the effects such as the opening, each round, between rounds, and the ending are grasped, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped results is obtained. command to the display control device 500 . In addition, based on the grasped result, the display data for the big win effect, the sequence data for the big win effect, the parameter data, the sound data, and the light emission data are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the display lamp devices 23A and 23B during the big win effect are read out. and the output mode of sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the demonstration display process, based on the received demonstration display command, the effect mode of the demonstration display is grasped, and a demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 500 . Further, based on the grasped result, light data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) are read from ROM 412 and common ROM 404, It defines the lighting mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode of the sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the demonstration display. The processing executed by MPU 402 based on commands transmitted from main controller 300 includes processing for controlling light emission of various lamp units 95 to 97 in addition to the processing described above.

Further, the MPU 402 recognizes that the operation button 35 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the operation button 35 based on the operation of the operation portion of the operation button 35, and performs operation corresponding processing. Execute. Also, when the operated state is canceled, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed. In the operation response process, an operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and an operation generation command including information indicating that the operation button 35 has been operated and information on the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 500 . Further, in the operation response process, an operation cancellation command is transmitted to the display control device 500 when the operation of the operation unit is canceled (cancelled). Further, in the operation response process, in addition to the transmission of the above command, the light emission mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode of the sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C are made to correspond to the operation of the operation button 35. stipulate.

Next, the connection relationship between the DAC 403d provided in the sound output LSI and the speaker units 26A to 26C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between a DAC provided in the sound output LSI and a speaker section.
As shown in FIG. 37, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c that amplify the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. . The analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker section 26A, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2b is output to the speaker section 26B, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2c is output to the speaker section 26B. It is output to the section 26C.
That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can independently control the volume output (reproduced) from each of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 34, the program and processing data for executing the abnormality reporting process stored in the ROM 412 are different between the power recovery reporting process and the normal reporting process. different. Specifically, at least the parameter data that defines the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c are different. More specifically, the power recovery notification process is different from the normal notification process. Specifically, at least the parameter data that defines the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c are different.

More specifically, in the notification process for when the power is restored, the parameter data is set so that the playback volumes of the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c are the same. On the other hand, in the normal time notification process, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A provided in the pachinko machine 10 is made smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26B and 26C, in other words, amplification is performed. Parameter data is defined so that the amplification factor of the circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is set to be lower than that of the other speaker sections 26B and 26C. ing. Note that, in the present invention, the expression that the reproduction volume is reduced includes a mode in which the reproduction volume is zero or substantially zero.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 reduces the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A among the plurality of speaker sections 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, so that the player can play games at the next seat. This reduces the risk that the player who plays the game will find the notification sound annoying. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a speaker arranged on a side different from the supporting side of the frame (the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14), in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the player when the frame is opened. Decrease the reproduction volume of the section 26A. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the notification sound by the players sitting in the adjacent seats. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine that are being played due to abnormal notifications, and the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine can be suppressed more effectively. This further reduces the risk that the player will be distracted by being caught.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a speaker unit 26B and a speaker arranged on the support side of the frame (the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14), in other words, on the far side from the player sitting next to the player when the frame is opened. The reproduction volume of the section 26C is not decreased. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player sitting next to the player may feel annoyed by the notification sound, and reduce the risk that the manager or employees of the hall may miss the abnormality notification.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device. The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes timer interrupt processing to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the timer interrupt process of FIG.

In step S1401, the MPU 402 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302 , it stores the received command in the RAM 413 . Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302 , and the MPU 402 stores commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 302 . The MPU 402 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 controls performance control including basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result of whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot), information on the number of pending balls in operation, and the fluctuation time of special symbols. A command (type command, variation pattern command or decorative pattern designation command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives this. Moreover, MPU302 transmits the production|presentation control command (production stop command) which instruct|indicates production stop after predetermined time (special design fluctuation time) progress, and MPU402 receives this. Furthermore, with respect to the information specifying the game state, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (game state specification command or jackpot command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the game state transition occurs). and the MPU 402 receives it. As a result, the MPU 402, in other words, the sound emission control device 400, grasps the current game state, and controls the shift to a predetermined presentation mode.

In step S1402, the MPU 402 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 302 of the main controller 300. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 402 executes the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In step S<b>1403 , the MPU 402 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the command received from the MPU 302 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Note that the effect determination processing in step S1402 will be described later in detail.

In step S1404, the MPU 402 controls the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the first to third holding lamp units 95a to 96 based on the effect determination processing in step S1402 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S1403. light emission control processing. In step S1405, the MPU 402 executes audio control processing for audio-controlling the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the effect determination processing in step S1402 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S1403.

In step S1406, the MPU 402 performs power recovery notification processing (step S416) in the main processing (see FIG. 24) and normal notification processing (step S1303) in the front door frame open monitoring processing (FIG. 33). Then, an abnormality notification process is performed. The details of this abnormality notification process will be described later.

In step S1407, the MPU 402 executes result display processing. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is executed when the high-frequency support mode (time saving) ends without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the variable probability state. The details of the result display processing will be described later.

In step S1408, the MPU 402 executes suggestion effect processing. In the suggestive effect process, the MPU 402 executes an effect suggesting the possibility that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state at a predetermined timing. The details of the suggestion effect processing in step S1408 will be described later.
After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing. The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like.

In step S1501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302 have been received. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S1509. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S1501 (YES), in step S1502, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "loss result" ("special failure result", other than "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result").

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the "loss result" (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S1503 whether or not the game result is the "special loss result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S1503 that the game result is not the "special loss result" (NO), in step S1504, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 402 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. Information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2") is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Also, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a “few rounds high probability result” or a “few rounds low probability result”, the same even number Information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "4, 4, 4") is determined. Furthermore, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result", the symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L (for example, "2 2 2”) to determine the information related to the combination.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the “special loss result” in step S1503 (YES), the MPU 402 executes common symbol determination processing in step S1505. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In addition, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "loss result" at step S1502 (YES), in other words, when it determines that it is a "normal failure result", at step S1506, the symbol for normal failure is determined. Execute the process. In this normal-off symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When determining that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1504, step S1505, or step S1506, the MPU 402 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1507. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 402 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to data pre-stored in the ROM 412 . Specifically, the MPU 402 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In addition, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and also executes sound control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1508, the MPU 402 generates a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1503, S1505, and S1506, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1507. to the display control device 500 . Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 retrieves a data table for executing the effect for the game cycle on the pattern display device 91 from various data storage areas of the program ROM 512. read out. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes an effect for a game cycle based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 402 on the stop symbol effective line L. to finally stop displaying.

After executing the process of step S1508, or when it is determined in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S1509 and subsequent steps. In step S1509, the MPU 402 performs open/close execution mode processing. In the opening/closing execution mode process of step S1509, the MPU 402 determines whether or not an opening command has been received, and if it determines that an opening command has not been received, executes the processes from step S1510 onward. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the opening command is received, the MPU 402 determines the type of the game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the determined type of the game result. Execute the process.

In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 402 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the “special loss result”. Further, when the game result is determined to be "few rounds high probability result" or "few rounds low probability result", the MPU 402 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 402 selects the effect C as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", it selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Incidentally, the duration of the effect A corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short period of time in the opening and closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Next, the MPU 402 performs light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selection result of the effects A to D. Next, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the determined type of game result. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads out from the program ROM 512 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 91 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

After executing the process of step S1509, the MPU 402 determines in step S1510 whether or not to generate an effect type selection process for causing the player to select the mode effect after the end of the jackpot game. Execute the selection process. This effect type selection process will be described later in detail.

In step S1511, the MPU 402 executes effect transition processing. In effect transition processing, the MPU 402 performs transition processing to the mode effect after the end of the jackpot game selected in step S1510. The details of the effect transition processing in step S1511 will be described later.

In step S1512, the MPU 402 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 402 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode and the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, based on the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302, for example. . After that, the MPU 402 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction. As shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10, as game results excluding the "ordinary loss result", "jackpot win" and "special loss result" results, "few rounds high probability results", "few rounds low results". Probable Result", "Most Favorable Result", and "Low Probable Result" distribution results.

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 40, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not obtained in the lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result that is selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 83a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", it does not shift to the lottery mode. Also, in the "special out-of-game result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1"). Also, in the case of the "special out-of-range result", the transition to the support mode is not made.

In the "small round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long time mode. . In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "few-round high-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "4.4.4"). In addition, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 rounds in the "few-round high-probability result" mode. In addition, the symbol display device 91 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high-probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the "small round low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of two times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long time mode. . In addition, in the "small round low probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. In addition, in the "few rounds low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "4.4.4"). In addition, in the "small round low probability result", the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode. In addition, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2"). ), the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode. In addition, in the "best result", the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times.

In the "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode. Here, in the "best result", the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. In addition, in the "low-probability result", the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment and the effect.
The effect selected in the “special out-of-order result” is the effect A. The production A includes an opening production A1 for the opening/closing execution mode, an production A2 for opening and closing the variable winning device in the opening/closing execution mode, and an ending production A3 for the opening/closing execution mode. there is

The effect selected in the “few rounds high probability result” is the effect B. The effects B include an opening effect B1 for the opening/closing execution mode, a effect B2 for opening and closing the variable winning device, an ending effect B3 for the opening/closing execution mode, and a high-frequency support mode effect. B4 is included.

The effect selected in the "few rounds low probability result" is the same effect B as the "few rounds high probability result". The effects B include an opening effect B1 for the opening/closing execution mode, a effect B2 for opening and closing the variable winning device, an ending effect B3 for the opening/closing execution mode, and a high-frequency support mode effect. B4 is included.

The effect selected in the "best result" is the effect C. The effects C include the opening effect C1 for the opening/closing execution mode, the effect C2 for opening and closing the variable winning device, the ending effect C3 for the opening/closing execution mode, and the effect during the high-frequency support mode. C4 is included.

The effect selected in the "low-probability result" is the effect D. The effects D include an opening effect D1 for the opening/closing execution mode, a effect D2 for opening and closing the variable winning device, an ending effect D3 for the opening/closing execution mode, and a high-frequency support mode effect. D4 is included.

As described above, the "small round high probability result" and "small round low probability result" differ depending on whether the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode or the low probability mode. They are common in that opening and closing is performed twice in a long-time manner, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, and the effect is effect B. Further, in the "few rounds high probability result", the symbol display device 91 does not display on the display screen G an image clearly indicating the high probability mode. Therefore, the player confirms the stop result (if the stop result of the "few rounds high probability result" is a combination of symbols having the same even number), the game result is "few rounds high probability result". and "few round low probability results" cannot be grasped. In other words, the "small round high probability result" is a latent probability change, and even if it becomes "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery and shifts to the high probability mode, the pattern display device 91 is disguised as if the win/loss lottery mode has not been shifted in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

However, since it is difficult to determine whether the current mode is the high-probability mode or not, the latent-probability mode does not notify the user of the high-probability mode. The sense of anticipation for the game quickly declines, and the game may be canceled even though it is in latent mode. For this reason, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes, at a predetermined timing, an effect suggesting the possibility of a variable latent probability state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, it is possible to play the game while enjoying at what timing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state appears.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance time of the opening performance in each performance is the same. Also, in the present embodiment, the effect time of the ending effect in each effect is the same. However, the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation time of the ending presentation are arbitrary, and the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation of the ending presentation may be different times. Also, for each game result (excluding the small round high probability result and the small round low probability result), that is, the production time may be around for each opening production, or even if the production time is different only for some opening production good. Furthermore, for each game result (excluding the small round high probability result and the small round low probability result), that is, the production time may be around for each ending production, or even if the production time is different only for part of the ending production good.

Note that the performance of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to be configured as a series of performances. For example, depending on the model of the gaming machine, a "promotion effect" or a "step-up notice effect" may be performed. When the promotion effect is performed, the promotion occurrence effect is performed as the promotion effect during the operation of the variable winning device 83 (during the opening/closing execution mode). Also, when the step-up notice effect is performed, the effect contents differ depending on how far the step-up is performed. In this way, when a promotion effect or a step-up effect is performed, at least a part of the effect is different, so it is not always necessary to have a series of effects.

In the "promoting effect", the combination of the jackpot results with even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line regardless of whether it is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result in the game round that results in the jackpot result. In addition to the stop result, an effect indicating whether or not the success/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode will be the high probability mode during the opening/closing execution mode that occurs thereafter is included. For example, in the opening and closing execution mode after the most favorable result, a promotion occurrence effect is performed as a promotion effect, and in the opening and closing execution mode after a low probability result or a low probability result in a few rounds, a promotion non-occurrence effect is performed as a promotion effect. done.

In addition, the "step-up notice effect" is to step-by-step give a big hit notice while changing the content of the notice and the reliability of the notice. Specifically, in the step-up notice effect, a predetermined effect step including the display of effect images on the pattern display device 91 is executed up to a predetermined step out of a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages) according to the reliability of the big win. be. That is, in the step-up notice effect, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher as the stage of the effect step progresses.

<Regarding Suggestion Effect Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIGS. 42 to 48 (excluding FIG. 43) are diagrams showing flowcharts of the suggestion effect processing (S1408 in FIG. 38) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 cannot grasp whether the lottery result of the jackpot game is a "small round high probability result" (latent probability) or a "small round low probability result" (guess). However, depending on the player, the sense of expectation for the big win will soon decline, and the game may be stopped despite being in the latent probability mode (latent probability variable state). For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (suggestive effect) suggesting the possibility of a variable latent probability state at a predetermined timing. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48 (excluding FIG. 43), suggestion effects by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flow chart when executing the suggestive effect during the high-frequency support mode (during time saving). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 when the suggestive effect is executed during the high-frequency support mode will be described. In addition, the suggestive effect is executed before the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support mode (specific game state) reaches the specified number of times (100 times). ), the suggestive effect is executed.

In step S1601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S1601 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1601 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 checks in step S1602 whether the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S1602 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1602 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), the MPU 402 sets a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support mode in step S1603. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets “n” (n is an integer equal to or greater than 0 and less than 100) to a variation counter FC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 . This fluctuation number counter FC is a counter for the MPU 402 to specify the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support that shifts after the jackpot game when the game result is a "few-round high-probability result".

In step S1604, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a fluctuation end command has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the fluctuation end command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the fluctuation end command has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the fluctuation end command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter FC to update the value in step S1605.
In step S1606, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the variation number counter FC is "0" or less. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1606 that the value of the variation number counter FC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the suggestion rendering process.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the value of the variation number counter FC is equal to or less than "0" at step S1606 (YES), at step S1607, it executes a suggestive rendering process. As an example of the suggestive effect, the MPU 402 executes one or a combination of sound, light emission, video and movable character. For example, when outputting a sound, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read sound data suggesting the latent probability change from the common ROM 404 and reproduce it. Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 reads out sound data suggesting that the latency probability is variable from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it (outputs it from the speaker units 26A to 26C).

Further, when the light emission suggests that the latency probability is variable, the MPU 402 reads light emission data suggesting that the latency probability is variable from the ROM 412 or the common ROM 404, and based on the read light emission data, the indicator lamp device 23A, 23B to emit light. Also, when suggesting that the probability of latency is variable, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 a latency probability suggestion command for displaying a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of latency is variable. The display control device 500 causes the display screen G to display a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of latency is changed based on the latency probability suggestion command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402). In addition, when suggesting that the latent probability is variable in the video (image), the production B4 at the time of the high frequency support mode of the low probability result of the few rounds and the low probability result of the few rounds described in FIG. The background color, displayed characters, etc. may be slightly different. Also, in this case, in the battle production described later with reference to FIG. may be suggested to

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect is fixed (after the n-th change), but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, a number from 1 to 99 is determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) before step S1603. In step S1603, the MPU 402 sets the value determined by lottery to the variable number counter FC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413. FIG. In addition, the MPU 402 draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect each time the game (fluctuation) during the high-frequency support mode (during time reduction), and the number of games during the high-frequency support mode (during time reduction) ) is the specified number of times up to 100 times, the suggestion production is executed, and the number of games in the high frequency support mode (time saving) is the specified number of times up to 100 times If the lottery is not won, the suggestion performance may be executed at the time of the final game (100th variation). Further, the content of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of times the game is won in the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot grasp whether the game result is the “few rounds high probability result” or the “few rounds low probability result”. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the possibility of a variable latency state is executed at a predetermined timing (during the high-frequency support mode (during time reduction)). As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, it is possible to play the game while enjoying at what timing during the shortening of the working hours the effect suggesting the possibility of the variable latent state appears.

Next, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 when the suggestive effect is executed when the result screen is displayed after the high-frequency support mode will be described. In the following description, since the suggestive effect is executed on the presentation screen (result screen) such as the number of winning balls after the high-frequency support mode, the result display of step S1407 in FIG. After explaining the processing for use, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect after the high-frequency support mode (at the time of displaying the result screen) will be explained.

Note that the result screen is a screen showing information about the privilege given to the player in the high probability mode. For example, when a player wins a big win and shifts to the high probability mode, the player wins a big win again during the high probability mode, and the high probability mode may continue. Information on benefits given to the player in the high probability mode, such as the number of times the high probability mode has been won again during the high probability mode and information on prize balls paid out due to the winning of the jackpot. is displayed on the pattern display device 91 as a result screen.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flow chart of result display processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The result display processing will be described below with reference to FIG. The result display processing is executed by the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (step S1407 in FIG. 38).

In step S1701, total processing for result display is executed. The tallying process for result display calculates the information necessary for displaying the result screen based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 300 and the command indicating the number of times the jackpot has been won in the high probability mode. do.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not a final specific game round end command has been received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300 . In step S1702, when it is determined that the final specific game cycle end command has been received from the MPU 302 (YES), the process proceeds to step S1703, and a result display start command is transmitted to the display control device 500. FIG. Upon receiving the result display start command, the display control device 500 executes processing for displaying the result screen on the pattern display device 91 . After that, the process for result display ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that the final specific game round end command has not been received from the MPU 302 (NO), the result display process is terminated without executing step S1703.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing a suggestion effect when the result screen is displayed after the high-frequency support mode. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 44, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when displaying the result screen after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S1801, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S1801 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1801 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" (YES), in step S1802, the MPU 402 determines whether a result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. do. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1802 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestion rendering process in step S1803. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S1607 of FIG. 42, so redundant description will be omitted.

In addition, when suggesting that the probability of latency is changed by video, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 a latency probability suggestion command for displaying a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of latency is changed. The display control device 500 superimposes a video (including an image) suggesting that there is a probability of latency on the result screen based on the latency probability suggestion command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402), and displays the display screen G. to display. In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect is after it is determined that the result display start command has been transmitted, in other words, immediately after the result screen is displayed on the display screen G. The timing of executing the suggestion effect may be while the result screen is displayed on the display screen G. Also, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be after the result screen is displayed. In this case, in step S1802 of FIG. 44 , the MPU 402 determines whether or not a “result display stop command” for ending the display of the result screen has been transmitted to the display control device 500. If the "stop command" has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 may be configured to execute suggestive effect processing in step S1803.

In addition, on the result screen after the high-frequency support mode, the number of continuations of the jackpot game (so-called consecutive game number), the type of each jackpot game (number of rounds and name of the jackpot game), the total number of won prize balls, etc. are displayed on the display screen G. You may make it Also, on the result screen, when displaying the type of each jackpot game (the number of rounds and the name of the jackpot game), as a suggestive effect, whether the lottery was won in the variable state or the lottery in the normal state is indicated for each jackpot game. may be displayed on the display screen G at the same time. Furthermore, when the number of consecutive villas is large, the amount of information displayed on the result screen also increases. Therefore, the time for displaying the result screen on the display screen G may be changed according to the number of consecutive villas. For example, the time for displaying the result screen on the display screen G may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) each time the number of consecutive villas increases by one.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing suggestive effect processing during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 45, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S1901, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S1901 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1901 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1902 whether or not the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S1902 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1902 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1903 whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores any of the "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result" corresponding to the jackpot in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. Determine whether the corresponding flag is stored. When the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has not been won in step S1903 (NO), it ends the execution processing of the suggestion effect.

In step S1904, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S1903 (YES), the MPU 402 decides whether or not the jackpot has been won in step S1903 before the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not cleared. . When the MPU 402 determines in step S1904 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1904 that the high-frequency support mode has not yet ended, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (YES), the MPU 402 performs a suggestive effect in step S1905. process. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S1607 of FIG. 42, so redundant description will be omitted.

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect is when the jackpot is won, but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) in which round of the jackpot game won in step S1903 the suggestion effect is to be executed. The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect of step S1905 during the round game determined by lottery. In addition, the MPU 402 performs a lottery for each round to determine whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and if the lottery is won until the ending command is received or the final round (second round) of the winning jackpot game is won, If the above-mentioned lottery is not won until the ending command is received or until the final round of the winning jackpot game, the suggesting effect is executed in the ending period of the jackpot game or the final round of the winning jackpot game. can be Further, the content of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of rounds in which the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

Also, in the above description, the suggestive effect process is executed during the big win game (next big win) after the high-frequency support mode, but the suggestive effect process may be executed during the big win game. Specifically, in step S1901, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds, high probability result" has been received, and in step S1901, the MPU 402 has received a type command of "few rounds, high probability result". If so (YES), the MPU 402 may be configured to execute the suggestive effect process in step S1905.

Also in this case, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be when the jackpot is won, or the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, a lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) determines in which round of the jackpot game the suggestive effect is to be executed. The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect of step S1905 during the round game determined by lottery. In addition, the MPU 402 performs a lottery for each round to determine whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and if the lottery is won until the ending command is received or the final round (second round) of the winning jackpot game is won, If the above-mentioned lottery is not won until the ending command is received or until the final round of the winning jackpot game, the suggesting effect is executed in the ending period of the jackpot game or the final round of the winning jackpot game. can be Further, the content of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of rounds in which the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

46 to 48 are diagrams showing flowcharts of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to the modification of the first embodiment. Here, a mode of executing the suggestive effect process when the player's operation is accepted will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 46, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S2001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2001 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2001 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 checks in step S2002 whether the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2002 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2002 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), the MPU 402 sets a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support mode in step S2003. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets “100”, which is the prescribed number of times, to the variable number counters FC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 . This fluctuation number counter FC is a counter for the MPU 402 to specify the number of fluctuations in the high-frequency support that shifts after the jackpot game when the game result is a "few-round high-probability result".

In step S2004, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is accepted in step S2004 (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive effect process in step S2005. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S1607 of FIG. 42, so redundant description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2004 that the player's operation has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S2006 whether or not a variation end command has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the fluctuation end command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2006 that the fluctuation end command has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2006 that the fluctuation end command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter FC to update the value in step S2007.
In step S2008, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the variation number counter FC is "0" or less. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2008 that the value of the variation number counter FC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the suggestion rendering process.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the value of the variation number counter FC is equal to or less than "0" at step S2008 (YES), at step S2005, the MPU 402 executes suggestive effect processing. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has already been explained, so overlapping explanations will be omitted.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot clearly grasp whether the game result is the “few rounds high probability result” or the “few rounds low probability result”. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the player's operation is accepted, an effect is executed that suggests the possibility of the latent probability variable state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. Also, even if the player's operation is not accepted, the performance suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed at the end of the high-frequency support mode, so the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state. In addition, when the player's operation is not accepted, the suggestive effect processing may be ended without executing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state at the end of the high-frequency support mode (time saving). In addition, in the description with reference to FIG. 46, the end of the high-frequency support mode is detected when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number. The high frequency support mode end command may be received to detect the end of the high frequency support mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted while the result screen is being displayed will be described.
In step S2101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2101 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2101 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" (YES), in step S2102, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. do. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2102 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), in step S2103 the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is accepted in step S2103 (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive effect process in step S2104. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been described in step S1607 of FIG. 42, so redundant description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2103 that the player's operation has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S2105 whether or not a result display end command has been transmitted. When the MPU 402 determines that the result display start command has been transmitted in step S2105 (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2105 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot grasp whether the game result is a “few rounds high probability result” or a “few rounds low probability result”. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a player's operation is accepted, an effect is executed that suggests the possibility of a latent probability variable state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. Also, even when the player's operation is not accepted, the performance suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed at the end of the display of the result screen, so the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state. If the player's operation is not accepted, the suggestive effect processing may be ended without executing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state at the end of the high-frequency support mode (shorter working hours).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestive effect processing of the pachinko machine 10 (suggested when operation is accepted). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 48, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S2201, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2201 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2201 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S2202 whether or not the high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game has been started. judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2202 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2202 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S2203 whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores any of the "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result" corresponding to the jackpot in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. Determine whether the corresponding flag is stored. When the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has not been won in step S2203 (NO), it ends the execution processing of the suggestion effect.

In step S2204, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S2203 (YES), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2204 that the player's operation has not been accepted (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2204 that the player's operation is accepted (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S2205 whether or not the jackpot is won before the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not cleared. . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2205 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2205 that the high-frequency support mode has not ended yet, in other words, if it determines that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (YES), in step S2206, the MPU 402 , the process of suggestion effect is executed. Note that the example of the suggestive effect is the same as the example of the suggestive effect described with reference to FIG. 42, so redundant description will be omitted.

46 to 48, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any one of the operation buttons 35 (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 is pressed, 35c) is pressed, the MPU 402 may execute the suggestive effect when the buttons 35a to 35c of the operation buttons 35 are pressed in a predetermined order. In this case, the player can enjoy searching for what kind of operation will perform the effect suggesting the possibility of being in the latent probability variable state, and the amusement is improved. Also, it is possible to prompt the player to more actively intervene. Further, the tenth embodiment is provided with operation receiving means other than the operation button 35, for example, a touch sensor, etc., and the possibility of being in the latent probability changing state when the operation of this operation receiving means (touch sensor) is received is eliminated. It may be configured such that a suggestive effect is executed.

42 to 48 (excluding FIG. 43), the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect when the received type command is "few rounds high probability result". When the received type command is "small round low-probability result", an effect suggesting that the high-probability result was not won, in other words, the low-probability result may be executed. In addition, the MPU 402 determines whether the received type command is "few rounds high probability result" or "few rounds low probability result", and if the received type command is "few rounds high probability result", Execute a production that suggests winning a high-probability result, and if the received type command is "small round low-probability result", suggest that you did not win a high-probability result, in other words, a low-probability result You may make it perform the production|presentation which carries out.

Further, in the suggestion effect processing of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. 46, step S2003 and thereafter, in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. After S2203, an effect is performed to prompt the player to accept the operation. In the presentation prompting the player to accept the operation, for example, an image or video prompting the player to operate the operation button 35 is displayed on the display screen G (for example, the image of the operation button 35 is displayed together with the characters "Press!"). ), or a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C. Also, an image or video prompting the user to operate the operation button 35 may be displayed on the display screen G, and a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes abnormality notification processing to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S2301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2301 that the command for notifying when the power has been restored has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processing from step S2304. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2301 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2302. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2303, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts to read the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 . Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat will feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. Therefore, in the program and processing data for notifying when the power is restored, the reproduction volumes of the speaker units 26A to 26C are the same or substantially the same when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The parameters are defined so that the amplification factors of 403d2c are the same or substantially the same.

In step S2304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2309, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that the normal notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2305. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S2306, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . In the program and processing data for normal time notification, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is set to be smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26B and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. In other words, the parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. In addition, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2307, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When resuming the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is canceled, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts reproducing the BGM from the address, thereby resuming the reproduction from the position where the BGM was stopped. can be done.
When muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so as not to output the sound without stopping the reproduction of the BGM. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2308, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S2303 or S2306 and emitting light. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S2303 or S2306, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound data to the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when the power is restored, a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and output of warning sound) is started. Also, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data, and light emission data read out in step S2303 or S2306. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2309, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2309 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S2311. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2309 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S2310 the MPU 402 notifies the abnormality output from the speaker units 26A to 26C ("the door It instructs the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the reproduction volume of the sound such as "It's open!" and the output of the warning sound). The sound output LSI 403, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, performs control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, in step S2310, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the seat on the left side when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is reduced in volume. can be controlled to In step S2310, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to decrease, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. By updating the parameters to those of the case, and decreasing the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased. When performing control so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces the amplification factor of the amplification circuit 403d2a of the speaker section 26A to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A. control to

In step S2311, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S2311 that the door open notification cancel command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S2312. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2311 that it has received the door open notification cancellation command (YES), it executes the processing from step S2312 onward.
At step 1612 , the MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2313, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened during power shutdown!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S2313, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2314, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification cancellation command, in other words, sets the value of the flag to 0. . In step S2315, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2307. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM was stopped in step S2307, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructs the sound output LSI 403 to resume the reproduction of the BGM from that address, thereby stopping the BGM. Playback resumes from the position. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S2307, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2307, the BGM (including music and sound for effect) is stopped or muted. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S2308, when playing back (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S2303 or step S2306, processing is performed so that the playback volume of the voice or warning sound is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may Further, in step S2307, if the volume is decreased gradually or in stages while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S2313, the abnormality notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or approximately zero, and in step S2315, when the BGM playback is resumed, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the user without causing a sense of incongruity due to the sudden stop of the BGM and the change to a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

In the above description, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S2310 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. It is highly probable that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. It should be noted that the processing of steps S2309 and S2310 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15. - 特許庁

<Game flow>
FIG. 50 is a diagram explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When a game is started with the pachinko machine 10, the game is started from the normal mode (hereinafter also referred to as "first mode M1"). The "first mode" is a game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode. In the first mode M1, by entering a game ball into the first starting port 84a, the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

In the first mode M1, when a jackpot is won, a distribution lottery shifts to one of ``few rounds high probability result'', ``few rounds low probability result'', ``low probability result'', and ``most advantageous result''. The "few rounds high probability result" (hereinafter also referred to as "second mode M2") is a mode in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a game state with a limited number of times up to 100 times. That is, in the second mode M2, if the jackpot is not won again within the support mode limit of 100 times, the high frequency support ends, but the win/fail lottery mode remains the high probability mode.

In addition, "small round low probability result" (hereinafter also referred to as "third mode M3") is a mode in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a game state with a limit of up to 100 times. be. That is, in the third mode M3, if the next big win is not promised and the support mode does not win the big win again by 100 times, which is the number of times limit, the high frequency support ends and the winning lottery mode changes to the low probability mode. In addition, the mode shifts to the first mode M1, which has no support mode.

In addition, the "low-probability result" (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth mode M5 (revenge mode)") is a low-probability lottery mode and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times for the support mode. This is the game state mode. In the fifth mode M5, the next big win is not promised, and if the big win is won again by the support mode limit of 100 times, the revenge will be successful, but the support mode will reach the limit of 100 times. When the jackpot is not won again, the revenge fails, the high-frequency support ends, and the success/fail lottery mode shifts to a low-probability mode and a first mode M1 having no support mode.

In addition, the "most advantageous result" (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode)") is a mode in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a game state with no limit on the number of games. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next big win is guaranteed, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big win. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of effects MA to MC (three types in this embodiment) with different effects as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

In this embodiment, an effect type selection effect for selecting the effect type in the fourth mode M4 is executed during the effect of the opening and closing execution mode of "best result", more specifically during the round game. An image for selecting the effect of M4 is displayed on the display screen G. When the player operates the operation button 35 and selects a desired effect from among the effects MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the effect in the fourth mode M4 which shifts after the game of "best result" is selected. It will be a directed performance.

Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 50 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all game flows of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. For example, in the present embodiment, mode transition is not performed for the special out result (small hit), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a "special out result (small hit result)", The "special loss result" does not serve as a trigger for transitioning to the lottery mode or the support mode, but serves as a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. For this reason, it may be configured such that the mode is shifted when the "special loss result" is won.

<Example of production image>
Next, an effect image displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with an example. When an internal lottery for a big win is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by the MPU 302 of the main controller 300, and the variation display is performed on the main display section 93. As described above, the main display section 93 The display area of is set to be extremely small, making it difficult for the player who pays attention to various effects executed by the pattern display device 91 to easily recognize each piece of information in the lighting state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. 8, the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 performs a variable display performance using decoration symbols, which are performance symbols. Note that illustration of a background image is omitted in FIG. 51 described below.

<Before change display>
Figure 51 (A): Before the special figure 1 starts to change (not in the demonstration stage), the display screen G displays a large row of decorative figures, which are the effect symbols. At this time, according to the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decoration figures of the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 are also stopped on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Start of changing display effect>
FIG. 51(B): Synchronizing with the start of fluctuation of special figure 1, the fluctuation display effect is started by scroll fluctuation of the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen of the display screen G. That is, in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decoration figures of the pattern display rows Z1 to Z3 are vertically scrolled (flowed) in the display screen of the display screen G. is started. In FIG. 51, the variable display of each symbol display row Z1 to Z3 is indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, individual production patterns are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the production pattern is displayed in a state that is easy to see on the display screen. be done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, the scenery of an airport or the like. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the presentation is, for example, the "first mode". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the "first mode" is, as described above, a game state (normal mode) in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and there is no support mode. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with various other performance modes, and a different background image is prepared for each performance mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the difference between the internal "win-win lottery mode" and "support mode". Although not particularly shown in FIG. 51, after this, for example, an image of a specific character, item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen to perform an announcement effect.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z1>
FIG. 51(C): After a predetermined time (for example, about half of the variable time) has passed, the symbol display row Z1 first stops variable display. In this example, it is shown that a decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped on the stop symbol valid line L.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z3>
FIG. 51(D): After the symbol display row Z1, the symbol display row Z3 stops changing display. In this example, it is shown that a decorative figure representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol valid line L. At this point, it has already been determined that the reach state will not occur, so it is almost clear visually that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. It should be noted that reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded here. The "sliding pattern" means that, for example, after a decorative figure representing the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol display row slides by one symbol and a decorative figure representing the number "8" is displayed in a stopped manner. By doing so, it develops into a reach. Alternatively, once the decorative figure representing the number "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative figure slides in the opposite direction by one symbol and the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed, thereby reaching the reach Evolving patterns are also possible. In addition, after a performance symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed, if a character appears on the screen and the variable display of the symbol display row Z3 is restarted, the number " It is also possible to think of a pattern in which a decorative figure representing "8" is displayed in a stationary manner and develops into a reach.

<Stop display effect>
Figure 51(E): Synchronizing with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the last symbol display row Z2 stops the variable display. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the special figure 1 is stop-displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode, the non-winning (losing) combination is also stop-displayed for the decorative figure. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 51(E), it indicates that a decoration figure representing the number "1" is stopped on the stop symbol valid line L. In this case, the combination of the decoration figures is "8.1".・Since it is a deviation of 3", it is expressed in the production that it corresponds to a normal "loss" in this change.

An example of the variation display and the stop display (at the time of non-winning) that are performed using a decorative figure for each variation has been described above with reference to FIG. Through the performance displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91, the player is given a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the big win will be won, and finally the result of the internal lottery is clearly taught in the performance. can be done.

<Production example of variable display>
Figure 52 and Figure 53, in the first mode M1 (gaming state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode), a case where a big win is won in the lottery and is distributed to the "most advantageous result" ( FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect C that is executed when a so-called first hit occurs. It should be noted that in the following description, the description of matters common to the above-described production example will be omitted. 52 and 53, background images are omitted.

<Before starting the variable display effect>
FIG. 52(A): On the display screen G, the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed large. In each of the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3, a combination of decorative figures representing the numbers "9, 1, 3" is displayed.

<Start of changing display effect>
FIG. 52(B): When the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 scroll and fluctuate on the display screen G, a variable display effect is started.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z1>
FIG. 52(C): The symbol display row Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In FIG. 52(C), a decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z3>
FIG. 52(D): The symbol display row Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In FIG. 52(D), a decorative figure representing the number "1" is displayed still.

<Stop display effect>
Figure 52 (E): In synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the symbol display row Z2 is stopped and displayed. Normally, if the special symbols are stopped and displayed as lost symbols, the decorative symbols, which are performance symbols displayed on the display screen G, are similarly stopped and displayed in a lost manner. However, in FIG. 52(E), the special symbols are stopped in the form of "Most Advantageous Result", and in the symbol display row Z2, a decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped.

<Production in open/close execution mode>
When the combination of decoration figures for the big win is stop-displayed on the display screen G, the opening/closing execution mode is entered after that, and the performance of the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the display screen G according to the result of lottery for the big win. Specifically, the effect C is executed as the effect of the opening/closing execution mode of the "best result" which is the result of the internal lottery.

Fig. 53(F): When the opening/closing execution mode is entered, an opening effect is executed. In this opening effect, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is greatly changed, and a character image G1 such as "BONUS!" be notified. If the player can be notified that he or she has won the jackpot, the notification may be made in another manner (for example, by outputting sound).

FIG. 53(G): Next, in order to inform the player that the game will be played with the right hand, for example, a character image G2 reading "Right hand!" be. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed to the right of the character image G3 of "Right shot!" In addition, in accordance with the notification of the right-handed game on the display screen G, the speaker units 26A to 26C output, for example, a voice saying "Right-handed!" In the pachinko machine 10, the variable winning device 83 is provided on the right side of the game board 81 as shown in FIGS. The amount of rotation of the handle 41 is maximized, and the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104 is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 103 is formed to the opposite side ( Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(G), the player is informed that a right-handed game will be played. Note that the right-pointing arrow and the character image G3 of "Right shot!" may be displayed so as to flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. As a result, even a player who cannot understand Japanese can intuitively understand that a right-handed game is to be played. In addition, in the following description, the right hitting navigation which is a suggestion of the right hitting game in the jackpot game state is also called the right hitting navigation for the jackpot game.

FIG. 53(H): Following the opening effect, the effect of opening and closing the variable winning device is executed. In this production, for example, a battle production is performed. In this battle presentation, the character on the player side and the enemy character battle, and by winning the battle, the player may be suggested to shift to the high probability mode after the big winning game. In addition, on the upper end side of the display screen G, a plurality of characters of "Right-handed" and a rightward arrow "→" are displayed to indicate that the right-handed game is continued. Further, an effect may be performed in which the characters "Right shot" and the rightward arrow "→" are displayed so as to flow from the left end to the right end of the display screen G.

FIG. 53(I): During the effect of opening and closing the variable prize winning device, the effect type that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode explained in step S1510 of FIG. A selection effect is executed. In this effect type selection effect, the player depresses the left direction button 35b and/or the right direction button 35c of the operation buttons 35, and selects one of the images GA to GC indicating the effect type displayed on the display screen G and selects the desired effect. Select an image that shows the type of effect. In the example shown in FIG. 53(I), the image GA is an image representing the effect MA, the image GB is an image representing the effect MB, and the image GC is an image representing the effect MC. When the player presses the operation button 35 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other non-selected images, indicating that the image has been selected. is configured so that After the player selects a desired effect, when the player presses the decision button 35a of the operation buttons 35, the effect corresponding to the selected image is determined as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Note that in this embodiment, if the player does not select and determine the desired effect within a predetermined time, specifically, by the 15th round, which is the final round, the effect that is predetermined by the initial settings (this implementation In the mode, the effect MA) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4. If the player does not select/determine the effect mode within the predetermined time, the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4 after the predetermined time elapses. You may do so. In the example shown in FIG. 53(I), the effect MB corresponding to the selected image GB (the image GB displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G) is automatically set as the effect in the fourth mode M4. selected for

In the example shown in FIG. 53(I), the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other images. / Alternatively, the images GA to GC corresponding to the effects MA to MC may move to the center of the display screen G when the right direction button 35c is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 53(J), the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, so the image GB is arranged in the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 53(J), in order to clearly show the selected image to the player, the selected image GB is placed in the center of the display screen G, and other selected images are displayed. The image GB is displayed on the topmost surface by overlapping (superimposed) on the images GA and GC that do not exist, and clearly indicates that the image GB is selected. In order to more clearly show the selected image to the player, the selected image GB may be displayed larger than the other unselected images GA and GC.

Also, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed on a gauge. For example, a gauge image G4 indicating the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is displayed below the image GB, and the remaining time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is displayed in red. The configuration in which the red area G4a (hatched area in FIG. 53(J)) decreases, specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red area G4a (hatched part) and the white area G4b (white area) changes with the passage of time It may be configured to move to the left when facing the display screen G. FIG. In addition, the red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 53(J)) of the gauge image G4 increases with the passage of time. may move to the right side of the display screen G as time elapses. Furthermore, the details of the effect being selected, for example, an explanation of what effect the selected effect is, may be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the attribute information (metadata) describing the content of each effect is stored in the ROM 412 or the like, and the MPU 402 stores the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 35 in the ROM 412 . , and transmits a command instructing the display control device 500 to display the read attribute information on the display screen G. FIG. Further, the attribute information of the effect is stored in various data storage areas of the program ROM 512, and the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 stores the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 35. from various data storage areas of the program ROM 512 and display it on the display screen G. Also, the music used in the currently selected presentation may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. At this time, the music output in the current presentation is temporarily stopped, and the music used in the currently selected presentation is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In this way, by presenting the details of the effect being selected to the player, the player can easily select the effect that suits his/her taste, and the interest is increased.

<Production type (type) selection process>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type (type) selection process. MPU 402 of sound emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process in step S1510 of the effect determination process in FIG. 39, as described above.
In step S2401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2401 that the game result is not the "best result" (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2401 that the game result is the "best result" (YES), in step S2402 it determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the opening command was received. Note that the MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S2402 is executed. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S2402 is 2 msec, the MPU 402 counts the number of times the process of step S2402 is executed and determines that 10 sec has passed when the number reaches 5000 times. judge. Note that the configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). When the MPU 402 determines in step S2402 that the predetermined time has not passed since the reception of the opening command (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

Also, when the predetermined time has passed in step S2402 (YES), the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to start the effect type selection effect in step S2403. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the image of the effect type selection effect on the display screen G. As described above, the effect type selection effect provides the player with three different types of effects of the fourth mode M4, which is shifted to when the player wins a jackpot in the lottery and is sorted to the "most advantageous result". It allows selection from the type modes MA, MB, and MC. The player operates the operation button 35 in this type of effect selection effect to select a desired effect mode.

At step S2404, the MPU 402 accepts selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses the left direction button 35b and/or the right direction button 35c of the operation buttons 35, and selects images corresponding to the desired effects MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. . In this step S2404, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. do. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Also, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select an image GC, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB.

In step S2405, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a has been accepted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2405 that the pressing operation of the enter button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, in step S2405, when the decision operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 402 changes the effect MA to the fourth mode M4 after the first mode M1 in step S2406. Set as a performance. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S2405, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S2406. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S2405, when the MPU 402 accepts the decision operation with the image GC selected, in step S2406, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 .

If it is determined in step S2405 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S2407 whether a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S2407 is executed. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process in step S2407 is 2 msec, the MPU 402 counts the number of times the process in step S2407 is executed and determines that 10 sec has passed when the number reaches 5000 times. judge. Moreover, the configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S2407, if the predetermined time has passed (YES), the MPU 402 sets a predetermined effect (in this embodiment, effect MA) as the effect in the fourth mode M4 in step S2408. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. As described above, in step S2407, if the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. good.

Also, in step S2407, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect type selection process.

<Another example of effect type selection processing>
In addition, instead of measuring the predetermined time in steps S2402 and S2407 of FIG. 54, the determination processing of S2402 and step S2407 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be counted based on the number of received opening commands and round start commands (hereinafter also referred to as opening commands, etc.) in step S1005 of FIG. In this case, in step S2402, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the number of received opening commands and the like is 3 (third round). is started, and in step S2407, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the number of receptions of the release command etc. is 15 (15th round which is the final round). You may make it set the production|presentation of the initial setting of .

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of another example of the effect type selection process. MPU 402 of sound emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process in step S1510 of the effect determination process of FIG. 39, as described above.
In step S2501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2501 that the game result is not the "best result" (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S2501 that the game result is the "best result" (YES), in step S2502 it sets a counter to count the number of opening commands received after receiving the opening command. .

In step S2502, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game state is the third round of the jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives an open command or the like, and determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like has reached 3 (third round). When the MPU 402 determines in step S2503 that the number of received opening commands and the like is not equal to or greater than 3 (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

Further, when the number of received opening commands or the like is 3 or more in step S2503 (YES), the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to start the effect type selection effect in step S2504. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the image of the effect type selection effect, specifically the image shown in FIG. indicate.

At step S2505, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type mode MA, MB, MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses the left direction button 35b and/or the right direction button 35c of the operation buttons 35, and selects images corresponding to the desired effects MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. . In this step S2505, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. do. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Also, when the player operates the operation button 35 to select an image GC, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB.

In step S2506, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a has been accepted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2506 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. That is, in step S2506, when the decision operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 402 sets, in step S2507, the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S2506, when the decision operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S2507. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Also, in step S2506, when the MPU 402 accepts the decision operation with the image GC selected, in step S2507, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 .

The MPU 402 determines in step S2508 whether or not an open command or the like has been received. If it is determined in step S2508 that an open command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect type selection process. Also, in step S2508, when it is determined that an opening command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S2509 whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives an opening command or the like, and checks whether the number of receptions of the opening command or the like reaches 15 or more (the 15th round), which is the final round. judge.

In step S2509, if it is determined that the number of received opening commands, etc. is not 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (NO), the MPU 402 cancels the effect determined for the player in step S2510. It is instructed to make a notification to confirm whether Specifically, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 to display a character image for confirming whether to cancel the determined effect, such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" In addition, the MPU 402 controls so that the sound "Do you want to cancel the presentation?" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice “Do you want to cancel the effect?” Then, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound "Do you want to cancel the performance?" Also, in step S2509, when it is determined that the number of receptions such as an open command is 15 or more (15th round) which is the final round (YES), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect processing.

In step S2511, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect determined in step S2506 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the operation button 35 by the player. In step S2511, when it is determined that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 402 returns to the operation of step S2505. Also, in step S2511, when it is determined that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is determined in step S2506 that the pressing operation of the enter button 35a has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S2512 whether or not an open command or the like has been received. If it is determined in step S2512 that the opening command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the effect type selection process. Also, in step S2512, when it is determined that an opening command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S2513 whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives an opening command or the like, and determines whether the number of receptions of the opening command or the like reaches 15 or more in the final round (15th round). determine what

In step S2513, when it is determined that it is the 15th round (YES), in step S2514, the MPU 402 performs a predetermined effect (in this embodiment, effect MA) in the fourth mode M4. set as Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. In step S2513, if it is determined that it is the final round (15th round) (YES), the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. It should be noted that the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect processing when the effect is set in step S2514.

Also, in step S2513, when it is not determined that it is the final round (15th round) (NO), in step S2515, the MPU 402 instructs the player to perform notification prompting selection/decision of the effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 causes the display control device 500 to display a character image prompting selection/decision of an effect such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Control. In the display control device 500, based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display effects such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Display a character image that prompts the selection/decision of In addition, the MPU 402 controls so that sounds such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" The sound output LSI 403 is read out and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that sounds such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" .

It should be noted that the timing at which the effect type selection effect is started is arbitrary. Also, the number of rounds for starting the effect type selection effect may be randomly determined using a counter stored in the RAM 413 . Also, in the above description, the effect can be canceled according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled up to the 14th round). The configuration may be such that the performance can be canceled.

<Production Transition Processing>
Next, a description will be given of the transition processing to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when a jackpot is won in the lottery and the distribution result is the "best result". Normally, when a big win is won in a winning lottery, the performance of the opening/closing execution mode is executed according to the distribution result, and after the ending period ends, the performance of the next mode is started. However, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when a big win is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode effect C corresponding to the most advantageous result is executed. During the ending period of the effect C, the effect of the fourth mode M4 is started.

Specifically, control is performed so that the output of the music used in the fourth mode M4 effect is started during the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the most advantageous result. In this embodiment, the timing of starting to output music and voice from the speaker units 26A to 26C changes according to the type of effect set in step S2406 or S2408 of the type of effect selection process in FIG. In the following description, in the fourth mode M4 presentation, the presentation of music is also referred to as music presentation, and the presentation of video displayed on the display screen G is also referred to as video presentation.

Hereinafter, the processing for shifting to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, there are three types of effects MA to MC in the fourth mode M4, and transition processing differs for each of the effects MA to MC. Details of transition processing for each of the effects MA to MC will be described below. It should be noted that, in the following description, right-handed navigation, which is a suggestion of a right-handed game when shifting to the fourth mode (RUSH mode), is also referred to as right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Transition processing to effect MA: Fig. 56(a)>
First, the case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition processing to the production MA, the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C from the start time T1 of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "best result". is controlled to start. Here, in the production MA, the ending period of the production C and the period of the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro part ends at the end time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speakers 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part of the music is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

In addition, in the transition processing to the effect MA, control is performed so that the sound of "A RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro part. Specifically, the output of the voice "A RUSH rush" is started after the voice start time TW1 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the voice "A RUSH rush" is output at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part is finished. is controlled to terminate. Here, the voice start time TW1 is a time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "A RUSH Rush" from the ending period or the output period of the intro part. For example, if the output period of the ending period or the intro part is 10 seconds and the audio output time of "A RUSH Rush" is 2 seconds, the audio start time TW1 is 8 seconds. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the voice "A RUSH rush" is started after 8 seconds from the start time T1 of the ending period.

In addition, at the time T2 when the ending period ends, a sound of "Right-handed" is output to suggest a right-handed game, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the voice saying "Right shot" is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MA is started. It should be noted that control may be performed so that characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G at the end time T2 of the ending period to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "It's a right hit", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). controlled.

<Transition processing to effect MB: Fig. 56(b)>
Next, the case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition processing to the effect MB, the intro part of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "best result". is controlled to start. Here, in the effect MB, the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the effect C. Therefore, the output of the intro part continues even after the ending time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speakers 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition processing to the effect MB, control is performed so that the sound of "B RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro part. Specifically, the output of the sound of "B RUSH rush" is started after the sound start time TW2 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the sound of "B RUSH rush" is output at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part is finished. is controlled to terminate. Here, the voice start time TW2 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "BRUSH Rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, if the output period of the intro part is 11 sec and the output time of the voice of "B RUSH Rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW2 is 9 sec. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the voice "B RUSH rush" is started 9 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

Here, in the transition processing to the effect MB, the sound of "B RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C across the ending time T2 of the ending period. For this reason, when the sound "Right hit" is output at the end of the ending period T2 to suggest a right-hand game, the "B RUSH rush" sound and the "Right hit" sound are output together. be done. Therefore, in the process of transitioning to this effect MB, without outputting the sound of "Right shot", at the end of the ending period T2, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right hand game is displayed on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-hand navigation is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Right hit" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MB is started.

<Transition processing to effect MC: FIG. 56(c)>
Next, the case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition processing to the production MC, the intro part of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C from the start time T1 of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "best result". is controlled to start. Here, in the production MC, the period of the intro part of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period of the production C. Therefore, the output of the intro part ends before the ending time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is completed.

In addition, in the transition processing to the effect MC, control is performed so that the sound of "CRUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro part. Specifically, the output of the voice "C RUSH rush" is started after the voice start time TW3 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the voice "C RUSH rush" is output at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part is finished. is controlled to terminate. Here, the voice start time TW3 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "CRUSH Rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, if the output period of the intro part is 6 seconds and the output time of the voice of "Rush to CRUSH" is 2 seconds, the voice start time TW3 is 4 seconds. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the voice "CRUSH Rush" is started 4 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

In addition, in the production MC, following the output of the sound of "CRUSH rush", the sound of "please hit the right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period T2, or at approximately the same time. At the same time, it is controlled so that the output of the voice saying "Please strike right" ends. In other words, the output time of the voice "Please hit right" is the time obtained by subtracting the output period of the intro part from the ending period. In addition, in the process of transitioning to the effect MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4, characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. is controlled to start right-hand navigation for RUSH.

<Production data>
Next, data used for transition processing to the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. The music data and voice data used in each of the effects MA to MC of the fourth mode M4 are stored in the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 of the voice emission control device 400 as sequence data, parameter data and sound data, respectively, as described with reference to FIG. stored. Specifically, the ROM 412 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C used respectively in the productions MA to MC, and the common ROM 404 stores the sequence data and parameter data used in the productions MA to MC respectively. The sound data corresponding to the music data A to C are stored. Then, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C from the ROM 412 and the sound data from the common ROM 404 as necessary, and controls the sound output LSI 403 to output them from the speaker units 26A to 26C. . More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A to C are output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. ) to control the sound output LSI 403 .

Here, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the music data A is associated with the presentation MA, the music data B is associated with the presentation MB, and the music data C is associated with the presentation MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The data is read from the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In addition, the music data A to C are respectively the intro part (prelude), the A melody part (the first melody of the song), the B melody part (the melody that follows the A melody), the chorus part (chorus), the interlude, and the out opening. It is composed of multiple clauses such as (afterword). Examples of common musical compositions are shown below. Note that the following example A and example B are merely examples, and the composition of music used in this embodiment is not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → Melody A → Melody B → Chorus → Interlude → Melody A → Melody B → Chorus → Interlude → Melody C → Chorus → Outro Example B) Intro → Melody A → Melody B → Chorus → Interlude → Melody B → Chorus → C melody → Outro

Further, the common ROM 404 and ROM 412 store voice data A to E and voice start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to FIG. 56, respectively. Here, the audio data A to C and the audio start times TW1 to TW3 are associated with each other. The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to read the audio data stored in the common ROM 404 as necessary and output it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. B is "Rush into B RUSH", voice data C is "Rush into C RUSH", voice data D is "Right shot", and voice data E is "Right shot please".

The ROM 412 also stores a time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. The MPU 402 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 412 when judging whether or not the ending period has ended.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the audio data A is associated with the production MA, the audio data B is associated with the production MB, and the audio data C is associated with the production MC. Also, the audio data D is associated with the production MA, and the audio data E is associated with the production MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to do so. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data A and sound data D are read out from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and set to the sound data A and sound data D. is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
Further, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. to control. More specifically, sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to audio data B are read from ROM 412 and common ROM 404 and set in register 403b of sound output LSI 403, and audio data B is output from speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be (reproduced).
Also, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. It controls the sound output LSI 403 . More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data C and the sound data E are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data C and the sound data E are set. is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound data corresponding to the sound data A to C are read out from the common ROM 404 based on the sound start times TW1 to TW3 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, when outputting the audio data A, the MPU 402 outputs sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data A after the audio start time TW1 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 56). is read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. When outputting the audio data B, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data B in the ROM 412 after the audio start time TW2 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 56). The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to read from the common ROM 404 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Furthermore, when outputting the audio data C, the MPU 402 stores the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data C after the audio start time TW3 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 56). The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to read from the common ROM 404 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Video data used in each effect of the fourth mode M4 is stored in the effect data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 512 of the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 . Specifically, image data A to D are stored in effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G according to the instruction from the MPU 402 .

Here, according to the data table, the image data A is associated with the effect MA, the image data B is associated with the effect MB, and the image data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. . Also, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG. Also, when the effect type set in step S2406 or S2408 of the effect type selection process in FIG.

The video data D is image data for right-hand navigation for RUSH. The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the image data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G when performing right-hand navigation for RUSH. Note that the image data D for right-hand navigation for RUSH is stored in the character ROM 506, and when performing right-hand navigation for RUSH, the MPU 502 reads out the image data D from the character ROM 506 and displays it on the display screen G. may be instructed to

<Transition processing to the fourth mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the processing for shifting to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for shifting to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the audio light emission control device 400 in the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to FIG. 56 will be described.

In step S2601, the MPU 402 determines whether an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2601 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S2602 it determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 based on the flag type set in the various setting flag storage area in step S2406 or step S2408 of FIG. Also, in step S2601, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending command has not been received (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

If the result of determination in step S2602 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 executes a transition process to the effect MA in step S2603. Note that the transition processing to the effect MA in step S2603 will be described with reference to FIG. Moreover, when the determination result of step S2602 is production|presentation MB, MPU402 performs the transition process to production|presentation MB in step S2604. In addition, the transition processing to the effect MB in step S2604 will be described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, when the determination result of step S2602 is production|presentation MC, MPU402 performs the transition process to production|presentation MC in step S2605. It should be noted that the transition processing to the effect MC in step S2605 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S2606, the MPU 402 clears the flags set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S2406 or step S2408 of FIG.

<Transition processing to production MA>
Next, the transition processing to the effect MA in step S2603 of FIG. 57 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when the effect MA is set.
In step S2701, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2704, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and TW1 is set to "2 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW1. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2702, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2706, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2703, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A for the production MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data A to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data A from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started.

In step S2704, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the speech start time TW1 has passed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2701. When the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW1 has passed (YES), it starts outputting the voice for the effect MA in step S2705. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data A "A RUSH Rush" for the production MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data A is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data A "A RUSH Rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW1 has not passed in step S2704 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MA.

In step S2706, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2702. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S2707. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D for the production MA "Right shot" from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data D is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "Right-handed" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. Also, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2706 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MA.

In step S2708, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads the video data A from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 505 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 402 .

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2704 and S2706 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MB>
Next, referring to FIG. 59, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MB in step S2604 of FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when setting an effect MB.
In step S2801, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2804, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, if the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and TW2 is set to "3 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW2. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2802, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2806, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2803, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B for the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data B to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data B is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2804, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the speech start time TW2 has passed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2801. When the MPU 402 determines that the sound start time TW2 has passed (YES), it starts outputting the sound for the effect MB in step S2805. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data B "B RUSH rush" for the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data B is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data B "B RUSH Rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2804 that the voice start time TW2 has not passed (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MB.

In step S2806, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2802. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts playing style navigation in step S2807. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to read out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. . Also, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2806 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MB.

In step S2808, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, MPU 402 instructs MPU 502 of display control device 500 to read and reproduce video data B stored in effect data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads the video data B from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 505 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 402 .

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2804 and S2806 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MC>
Next, referring to FIG. 60, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MC in step S2605 of FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when the effect MC is set.
In step S2901, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2904, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW3 is set as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and TW3 is set to "1 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW3. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2902, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S2906, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2903, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the production MC. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the production MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data C to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data C from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started.

In step S2904, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the speech start time TW3 has passed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2901. When the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW3 has passed (YES), it starts outputting the voice for the effect MC in step S2905. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data C "CRUSH Rush" for the production MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data C is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data C "C RUSH Rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Also, in step S2905, after outputting the sound data C "C RUSH rush" for the effect MC, the MPU 402 transfers the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data E "Right shot" to the ROM 412 and common data. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data E is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data E "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. It should be noted that the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound data E "Please hit right" is output after the output of the sound data C "CRUSH Rush". Therefore, from the speaker units 26A to 26C, after the sound "Rush into C RUSH" is output, the sound "Please hit right" is output. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2904 that the voice start time TW3 has not passed (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MC.

In step S2906, the MPU 402 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2902. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts playing style navigation in step S2907. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to read out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. . Also, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2906 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MC.

In step S2908, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the performance data storage area 1032 . The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads the video data C from the performance data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 505 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 402 .

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2904 and S2906 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In the present embodiment, the transition processing to each of the effects MA to MC has been described assuming that the types of effects in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are three types of effects MA, MB, and MC. The types of effects are not limited to the three types described above, but may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four types or more.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the support side. When the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, they are opened by rotating forward (toward the player) with the supporting side as the rotation axis. For this reason, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left, and the speaker section 26A is opened to face the player playing in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is reduced when notifying that the door is open. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A is zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a may be used, or an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like may be used.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is made smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26A and 26C. The parameters of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 of the sound emission control board 401 may be defined so that the gain is smaller than the gains of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right and left sides (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided, and this detector The volume of either the speaker section 26A or the speaker section 26B may be reduced based on the detection result in .

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 13 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the left. For this reason, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is set so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26B and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. A program and processing data in which parameters are defined so as to be smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c are read from the ROM 412 of the sound emission control board 401, and alarm sounds and voices indicating an abnormality are reproduced. Just do it. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a may be used, or an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like may be used.

Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. For this reason, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is set so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26A and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. A program and processing data in which parameters are specified so as to be smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c are read from the ROM 412 of the sound emission control board 401, and alarm sounds and voices indicating an abnormality are reproduced. Just do it. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b may be used, or an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b by a selector or the like may be used.

<Another Example of Abnormality Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the abnormality notification process when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes abnormality notification processing to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S<b>3001 , the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3001 that the command for notifying when the power is restored has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S3004 onward. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3001 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S3002. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S3003, the MPU 402 starts reading data for notifying when power is restored. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading out the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . In this program and processing data for notifying when the power is restored, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is the same or substantially the same when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The parameters are defined so that the rates are the same or substantially the same.

In step S3004, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3004 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3011, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3004 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S3005. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S3006, the MPU 402 detects that the detector is opened with the left side of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 as the support side, in other words, the detector detects that the right side of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened. It is determined whether or not it is detected.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the right side is open (YES), in step S3007, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification for opening the right side. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for opening the right side from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . In the program and processing data for normal time notification for opening the right side, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A when notifying the abnormality that the door is open is higher than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26B and 26C. In other words, the parameters are defined such that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a may be used, or an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like may be used. Further, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped during normal notification.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3006 that the right side is not opened (NO), MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification for opening the left side in step S3008. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts to read the program and processing data for the normal time notification for opening the left side, the light emission data, and the sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 . In the program and processing data for normal time notification for opening the left side, the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is higher than the reproduction volume of the other speaker sections 26A and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. In other words, the parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c. The parameters may be defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker section 26B may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B becomes zero. When muting is performed, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b may be used, or an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b by a selector or the like may be used. In addition, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S3009, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stopping process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When resuming the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is canceled, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts reproducing the BGM from the address, thereby resuming the reproduction from the position where the BGM was stopped. can be done.
When muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so as not to output the sound without stopping the reproduction of the BGM. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3010, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S3003, S3007, or S3008 and emitting light. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S3003, step S3007, or step S3008, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to reproduce (output) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when the power is restored, a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and output of warning sound) is started. Also, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data and light emission data read out in step S3003, step S3007 or step S3008. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S3011, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If the MPU 402 determines in step S3011 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S3013. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3011 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S3012 the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (normal notification) output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. It instructs the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the reproduction volume of the output of a voice such as "The door is open!" The sound output LSI 403, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, performs control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S3012 may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only the reproduction volume of a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A or the speaker part 26B, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the next seat when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is adjusted. You may control to make it small. Here, in step S3006, if the right side is open, the sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, and if the left side is open, the sound output LSI 403 Control is performed so that only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B is reduced.

In step S3012, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be small, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. The parameters are updated to those of the case, and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits of the speaker sections 26A to 26C is reduced, thereby reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker sections 26A to 26C. When performing control to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker section 26A. to control. Furthermore, when controlling to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26B by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker section 26B. to control.

In step S<b>3013 , the MPU 402 determines whether or not a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3013 that the door open notification cancellation command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S3014. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S3013 that it has received the door open notification cancellation command (YES), it executes the processing from step S3014 onward.
At step 2314 , MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S3015, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened during power shutdown!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S3015, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3016, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification cancellation command, in other words, sets the value of the flag to 0. . In step S3017, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S3009. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM was stopped in step S3009, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructs the sound output LSI 403 to resume the reproduction of the BGM from that address, thereby stopping the BGM. Playback resumes from the position. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S3009, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S3009, the BGM (including music and sound for effect) is stopped or muted. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S3010, when reproducing (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S3003, step S3007, or S3008, the reproduction volume of the sound or warning sound is gradually decreased or gradually increased to a predetermined value. can be processed. Further, in step S3009, if the volume is decreased gradually or in stages while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S3015, the anomaly notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or approximately zero, and in step S3017, when the BGM playback is resumed, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

Further, in the above description, it is determined in step S3011 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S3012 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. It is highly probable that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. It should be noted that the processing of steps S3011 and S3012 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light. , 23B may not emit light, the power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and for the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Also, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, one of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, It may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification processing. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who is playing a game in the adjacent seat will find the lighting of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B annoying. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat will lose the exhilaration and immersion feeling and lose interest in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment and modifications, the high-frequency support mode provided after the jackpot game, when the number of games (same as the number of fluctuations) reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times), low frequency Switch to support mode. In other words, in the present embodiment and modifications, the high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played is 100. However, the number of games played in the high frequency support mode is not limited to 100 times. For example, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of games played may be less than 100, or may be 101 or more.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a game board 81 having a game area on which game balls roll, and when a game ball passes through a specific area (first start opening 84a, second start opening 84b) of the game area 104, A big win lottery means (MPU 302) for performing a big win lottery to decide whether to shift to a big win game state advantageous to the player, and a probability variable state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous as a game state according to the result of the game. , a game state control means (MPU 302) for controlling a normal state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is lower than the variable probability state, and notifying the player of this even though the game state is in the variable probability state. It is provided with an effect control means (MPU 402, sound emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) for executing, at a predetermined timing, an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state in the latent probability variable state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state control means shifts to a specific game state (time saving) in which the variation time of the decorative symbols is shorter than usual until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined number of times. Move the game state. Therefore, the player can know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state by the effect. For this reason, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation and heighten the sense of anticipation for the next big win, even though the state of the variable probability state is hidden without being made explicit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is bored from quitting the game because the player's sense of expectation for the big win cannot be sustained despite the variable probability state. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

(2) The effect control means (MPU 402, sound emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10, before the number of fluctuations in the specific game state (time saving) reaches the specified number (100 times in this embodiment) Then, a production that suggests the possibility of being in a latent probability change state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game until the specific game state (reduction of working hours) after the end of the big win game state, with the player's expectation for the next big win increased. In addition, since the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent variable probability state is relatively short, the period in which the player feels stress without knowing whether the variable probability state is present is short. The effect of making the player continue the game is high. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

(3) The effect control means (MPU 402, sound emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 has reached the prescribed number of times (100 times in this embodiment) in the number of fluctuations (time reduction) in the specific game state. Later, an effect is executed that suggests the possibility of being in the latent probability change state. Therefore, the game can be continued with the player's expectation for the next big win increased until the specific game state (time saving) after the big win game state ends. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

[Second embodiment]
In the second embodiment, a pachinko machine 10 having a falling lottery function will be described. Falling lottery means that the game state shifts from a probability variable state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is advantageous to a normal state lower than the probability variable state by lottery. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the drop lottery together with the jackpot lottery during the variable probability state, and when the drop lottery is won, it falls from the variable probability state to the low probability state. Some of the conventional pachinko machines 10 do not notify whether or not the drop lottery is won and the player falls from the variable probability state to the low probability state. In this case, the player does not know whether the current game state is a variable probability state or a low probability state. For this reason, some players may immediately lose their sense of expectation for a big win and stop playing the game despite the fact that the probability is variable. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect suggesting that the player has fallen at a predetermined timing. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described, but only the process of notifying the result of the falling lottery will be described. Also, the configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described, and redundant description of the same configuration will be omitted.

FIG. 62 shows the occurrence of a jackpot stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 provided as success/failure information group storage means of the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the value of the random number elected. As shown in FIG. 62, the low-probability mode validity table includes the low-probability mode validity table (low-probability (normal) validity information group) shown in FIG. It also has a right/wrong table for the mode (high-probability (high-probability) right/wrong information group). The MPU 302 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the hit/fail table stored in the ROM 312 of the main controller 300 has "fall result" in the hit/fail table for the high probability mode. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to Specifically, under the game state (normal state) in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. Result" and "Normal Outlier Result". In addition, under the game state (normal state) in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to during the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. It has a plurality of lottery results (win/fail results) of occurrence of big hits, such as "result of falling" and "result of normal failure". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, there are two random number values for the "fall result".

The value and the number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode should have a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win". Also, the value and number of random numbers for the "fall result" are arbitrary.

When the "fall result" is won, the MPU 302 shifts the game state from the probability variable state with an advantageous lottery probability to the normal state lower than the probability variable state. Specifically, the MPU 302 clears the high-probability mode flag set in the high-probability mode flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313, and the game state and the lottery probability of the pachinko machine 10 are changed from the advantageous variable state to the variable state. transition to a lower normal state.

<Variation start processing>
Next, variation start processing of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In step S3101, the MPU 302 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 302 determines in step S3101 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (NO), then in step S3102 the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 62A) is retrieved from the win/fail table storage area of the ROM 312. read out. If the MPU 302 determines in step S3101 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 302 stores the win/fail table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 62(b)) in the win/fail table of the ROM 312 in step S3103. Read from storage area.

After executing the process of step S3102 or step S3103, the MPU 302 executes the suitability determination process in step S3104. Specifically, MPU302, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, the success or failure table for the low probability mode read in step S3102 or the success or failure table for the high probability mode read in step S3103 The result of the winning lottery (winning result) is determined by comparing with. The hit/fail result is one of "big win", "special failure result", "fall result", and "normal failure result", and the hit/fail table of the high probability mode has "fall result". is different from the success/failure table in the low probability mode.

In step S3105, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S3104 is "big hit". If the MPU 302 determines in step S3105 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning" (YES), it executes the processing from step S3106 onwards, and if it determines that the win/loss result is not "jackpot winning" in step S3105 ( NO), the process after step S3112 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3105 that the win/loss result is "big hit" (YES), in step S3106 it determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 .

Here, when the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the first result display section 93a is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3106 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), in step S3107 the first distribution table (see FIG. 20A) is stored in the ROM 312. read out from the sorting table storage area.

Further, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the second result display section 93b is caused to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b. Therefore, if the MPU 302 determines in step S3106 that the second result display unit flag has been set in the RAM 313 (YES), in step S3108 the second distribution table (see FIG. 20B) is stored in the ROM 312. read out from the sorting table storage area.

After executing the processing of step S3107 or step S3108, the MPU 302 executes distribution determination processing in step S3109. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 302 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S3107 or step S3108 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S3110, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 302 determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and determines the determined information. That is, the RAM 313 stores information relating to symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 compares the sorting result determined in step S3109 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 312, and compares the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93. to decide. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S3111, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S3109. Specifically, when the MPU 302 specifies that the sorting result is a “low probability result”, it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that it is a “small round high probability result”, a small number of rounds If the high probability result flag is set and it is specified as "few rounds low probability result", if the few rounds low probability result flag is set and it is specified as "most favorable result", the most favorable result flag to set. After that, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3119. In addition, in the processing of each step below, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of a flag set in the RAM 313 to determine the sorting result.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3105 that the win/loss result is not "big hit winning" (NO), in step S3112, it determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S3104 is a "special loss result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S3112 that the win/loss result is the “special outlier result” (YES), it executes the processing from step S3113 onwards, and determines in step S3112 that the win/fail result is not the “special outlier result”. In the case (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S3115 whether or not the win/loss result is the "fall result".
If the MPU 302 determines in step S3115 that the result is not the “fall result” (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes from step S3116 onward, and if it determines in step S3115 that the result is the “fall result” ( YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3117.

In step S3113, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 302 determines information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, The RAM 313 is caused to store information, that is, information relating to symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 302 refers to a stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 312 to determine information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 . The mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the big win result. In step S3114, the MPU 302 sets a special exclusion flag in the RAM313. In each of the following processes, the MPU 302 refers to the presence or absence of the special loss flag set in the RAM 313 to determine whether the win/loss result is the "special loss result".

In step S3116, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the normal deviation result. In this stopping result setting process for the out-of-ordinary result, the MPU 302 determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 313 . Here, the MPU 302 refers to a stop result table for out-of-normal results pre-stored in the ROM 312 to determine information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 . It should be noted that the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the normal winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special losing result.

In step S3117, the MPU 302 executes stop result setting processing for the fall result. In this stop result setting process for the fall result, the MPU 302 determines information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 93a or the second result display portion 93b of the main display portion 93, and The information is stored in RAM 313 . Here, the MPU 302 refers to the stop result table for fall results stored in advance in the ROM 312 to determine information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 93 . Note that, in the present embodiment, the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for falling results is the same as the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for normal failure results. Therefore, the MPU 302 may refer to the stop result table for the out-of-ordinary result when executing the stop result setting process for the fall result. The memory capacity can be saved by making the same table referred to by the MPU 302 for the "fall result" and the "normal deviation result".

In step S3118, the MPU 302 executes a fall result process. Specifically, the MPU 302 clears the high-probability mode flag set in the high-probability mode flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313, and the game state and the lottery probability of the pachinko machine 10 are changed from the advantageous variable state to the variable state. transition to a lower normal state.

After executing any of the processes in steps S3111, S3114, S3116, and S3118, the MPU 302 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S3119. Note that the processing for setting the display duration (display duration) has been described in the first embodiment, so redundant description will be omitted.

In step S3120, the MPU 302 sets the variation command and the type command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S3120 to the sound emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 23). The sound emission control device 400 executes a predetermined process (start of variable display in step S3121) based on the command for variation and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302. This process will be described later in detail.

Note that the variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, but does not include information regarding whether or not the ready-to-reach display will occur. In addition, the type command includes information related to win/fail results and information related to sorting results. More specifically, the type command includes each information related to "jackpot win", "special failure result", "normal failure result", and "fall result" as information related to win/fail results. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the sorting result, each Contains information. In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are also collectively referred to as the game result. That is, the type command includes information about the game result.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
Next, the effect determination processing of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that the effect determination process of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the effect determination process of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment only in part. Effect determination processing of the gaming machine 10 will be described.

In step S1501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302 have been received. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S1509. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S1501 (YES), in step S1502, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "loss result" ("special failure result", other than "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result").

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the "loss result" (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S1503 whether or not the game result is the "special loss result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S1503 that the game result is not the "special loss result" (NO), in step S1504, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 402 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. Information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2") is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Also, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a “few rounds high probability result” or a “few rounds low probability result”, the same even number Information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "4, 4, 4") is determined. Furthermore, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result", the symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L (for example, "2 2 2”) to determine the information related to the combination.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the “special loss result” in step S1503 (YES), the MPU 402 executes common symbol determination processing in step S1505. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In addition, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "loss result" in step S1502 (YES), in other words, when it determines that the game result is the "normal failure result" or the "fall result", in step S1506, the normal A symbol determination process for out is executed. In this normal-off symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs based on the content of the variation command.

It should be noted that the step processing after step S1506 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and redundant description will be omitted. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 41, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment determines which effect is selected for the "few rounds high probability result" or "few rounds low probability result". was the same in the production B, but in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the production selected in the "few rounds high probability result" and the production selected in the "few rounds low probability result" are the same. There may be or may be different. In addition, in the symbol determination in step S1504, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the same odd number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Alternatively, information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2") may be determined.

<Regarding Suggestion Effect Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
64 to 69 are diagrams showing flowcharts of the suggestive effect processing (S1408 in FIG. 38) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. In the following description, the case where the result of the falling lottery is notified in the suggestive effect process will be described, and other descriptions will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing a suggestive effect (announcing the result of the fall lottery) at the time of falling. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 64, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 when executing the suggestive effect when falling will be described.

In step S3201, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” or the “best result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3201 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3201 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" (YES), the MPU 402 receives the type command of "fall result" in step S3202. determine whether or not Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3202 that the type command of "fall result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3202 that the type command of "Fall result" has been received (YES), in step S3203, the MPU 402 executes a suggestion rendering process. As an example of the suggestive effect, the MPU 402 executes one or a combination of sound, light emission, video and movable character. For example, when outputting sound, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read sound data suggesting that the state has fallen from the high-precision state to the normal state from the common ROM 404 and reproduce it. Based on an instruction from the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 reads sound data suggesting a fall from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it (outputs it from the speaker units 26A to 26C).

Further, when the light emission suggests a fall, the MPU 402 reads the light emission data suggesting the fall from the ROM 412 or the common ROM 404, and causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B to emit light based on the read light emission data. . Further, when the video suggests that the user has fallen, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 a fall suggestion command for displaying a video (including an image) that suggests that the user has fallen. The display control device 500 displays a video (including an image) suggesting a fall on the display screen G based on the fall suggestion command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting that the player has fallen from the variable probability state to the normal state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, you may make it present (suggest) the frequency|count of a fluctuation|variation at the time of falling from a high probability state to a normal state.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing a suggestion effect when the result screen is displayed after the high-frequency support mode. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 65, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when displaying the result screen after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S3301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” or the “best result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3301 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3301 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most favorable result" (YES), the MPU 402 receives the type command of "fall result" in step S3302. determine whether or not Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3302 that it has not received the type command of "fall result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S3302 that it has received the type command of "fall result" (YES), in step S3303, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. FIG. When the MPU 402 determines in step S3303 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestion rendering process in step S3304. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been explained in step S3203 of FIG. 64, so redundant explanation will be omitted. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3303 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution process.

Note that when the video suggests that the user has fallen, the MPU 402 transmits to the display control device 500 a fall suggestion command for displaying a video (including an image) that suggests that the user has fallen. The display control device 500 superimposes a video (including an image) suggesting that the probability of falling is variable on the result screen based on the fall suggestion command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 (MPU 402), and displays it on the display screen G. display. In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the fall effect is after it is determined that the result display start command has been transmitted, in other words, immediately after the result screen is displayed on the display screen G. The timing for executing the suggestion effect may be while the result screen is displayed on the display screen G. Also, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be after the result screen is displayed. In this case, in step S3303 of FIG. 65 , the MPU 402 determines whether or not a “result display stop command” for ending the display of the result screen has been transmitted to the display control device 500, and the “result display If the "stop command" has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 may be configured to execute suggestive effect processing in step S3304. It should be noted that the result screen may present (suggest) the number of fluctuations when falling from the high-probability state to the normal state.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow chart for executing suggestive effect processing during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 66, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode will be described.

In step S3401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to a “few rounds high probability result” or “best result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3401 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" has not been received (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3401 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 in step S3402 enters a high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game. is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3402 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3402 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), in step S3403 the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3403 that it has not received the "fall result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3403 that it has received the "Falling Result" type command (YES), in step S3404, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores any of the "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result" corresponding to the jackpot in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. Determine whether the corresponding flag is stored. When the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has not been won in step S3404 (NO), it ends the execution processing of the suggestion effect.

In step S3405, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S3404 (YES), the MPU 402 decides whether or not the jackpot has been won in step S3404 before the end of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not cleared. . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3405 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S3405 that the high-frequency support mode has not yet ended, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (YES), the MPU 402 performs a suggestive effect in step S3406. process. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been explained in step S3203 of FIG. 64, so redundant explanation will be omitted.

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect is when the jackpot is won, but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) in which round of the jackpot game won in step S3404 the suggestion effect is to be executed. The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect of step S3406 in the round determined by lottery. In addition, the MPU 402 performs a lottery for each round as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and until the ending command is received or the final round (second round or 15th round) of the winning jackpot game, the lottery is performed. When winning, the suggesting effect is executed, and if the above lottery is not won until the ending command is received or until the final round of the winning jackpot game, the suggesting effect is executed during the ending period or the final round of the jackpot game. may Further, the content of the suggestive effect may be changed according to the number of rounds in which the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won. In this case, since the content of the suggestive effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is won, the player can be given the pleasure of trying to see various suggestive effects.

67 to 69 are diagrams showing flowcharts of suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to the modification of the second embodiment. Here, a mode of executing the suggestive effect process when the player's operation is accepted will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 67, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S3501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” or the “best result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3501 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3501 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 receives the type command of "fall result" in step S3502. determine whether or not Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3502 that it has not received the type command of "fall result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3502 that it has received the type command of "fall result" (YES), in step S3503, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the player's operation. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is accepted in step S3503 (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive effect process in step S3504. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been explained in step S3203 of FIG. 64, so redundant explanation will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3503 that the player's operation has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the suggestive effect execution process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting the possibility of a fall when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, you may make it present (suggestion) the fluctuation|variation frequency|count (game frequency|count) at the time of falling from a high probability state in high frequency support mode to a normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in executing the suggestion effect when the player's operation is accepted during the display of the result screen will be described.
In step S3601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” or the “best result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3601 that it has not received the "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3601 that it has received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 receives the type command of "fall result" in step S3602. determine whether or not Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3602 that it has not received the "fall result" type command (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S3602 that it has received a "fall result" type command (YES), it determines in step S3603 whether a result display start command has been sent to the display control device 500. FIG. When the MPU 402 determines in step S3603 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3603 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), in step S3604 the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines in step S3604 that the player's operation is accepted (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive effect process in step S3605. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been explained in step S3203 of FIG. 64, so redundant explanation will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3604 that the player's operation has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S3606 whether or not a result display end command has been transmitted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S3606 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestion effect process. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S3606 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive rendering process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting the possibility of falling when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state, and can enjoy the game without stress. Also, even if the player's operation is not accepted, an effect suggesting the possibility of falling is executed at the end of the display of the result screen, so the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state. It should be noted that the result screen may present (suggest) the number of fluctuations when falling from the high-probability state to the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is received during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of suggestive effect processing of the pachinko machine 10 (suggested when operation is accepted). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 69, the operation of the sound emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestive effect when the player's operation is accepted during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode will be described.

In step S3701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "best result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “few rounds high probability result” or the “best result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3701 that it has not received the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most favorable result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3701 that the type command of "few rounds high probability result" or "most advantageous result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 in step S3702 enters a high frequency support mode after the end of the jackpot game. is started. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether a flag corresponding to the “high frequency support mode” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3702 that the high-frequency support mode has not started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3702 that the high-frequency support mode has started (YES), in step S3703, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a type command of "fall result" has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the “fall result” is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3703 that it has not received the type command of "fall result" (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S3703 that it has received the "Falling Result" type command (YES), in step S3704, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has won a jackpot. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores any of the "few rounds high probability result", "few rounds low probability result", "best result", and "low probability result" corresponding to the jackpot in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. Determine whether the corresponding flag is stored. When the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has not been won in step S3704 (NO), it ends the execution processing of the suggestion effect.

In step S3705, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S3704 (YES), the MPU 402 decides whether or not the jackpot has been won in step S3704 before the end of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413, in other words, whether the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not cleared. . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3705 that the high-frequency support mode is not yet to end, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is cleared (NO), it ends the suggestive effect execution processing.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S3705 that the high-frequency support mode has not yet ended, in other words, that the flag corresponding to the high-frequency support mode has not been cleared (YES), in step S3706 the MPU 402 It is determined whether or not the operation of has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is accepted in step S3706 (YES), the MPU 402 executes a suggestive effect process in step S3707. Note that the example of the suggestive effect has been explained in step S3203 of FIG. 64, so redundant explanation will be omitted.

In FIGS. 67 to 69, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any one of the operation buttons 35 (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 is pressed, 35c) is pressed, the MPU 402 may execute the suggestive effect when the buttons 35a to 35c of the operation buttons 35 are pressed in a predetermined order. In this case, the player enjoys exploring what kind of operation is used to execute the effect suggesting the possibility of falling, and the interest is improved. In addition, it is possible to prompt the player to more actively intervene. Further, the tenth embodiment is provided with an operation receiving means other than the operation button 35, for example, a touch sensor, etc., and when the operation of this operation receiving means (touch sensor) is received, an effect suggesting the possibility of falling. may be configured to run.

64 to 69, the MPU 402 executes the suggestive effect when it receives a type command of "Fall result", in other words, when it falls from the definite variable state to the normal state. However, if the type command of "fall result" is not received, in other words, if the probability change state does not fall to the normal state, the suggestive effect may be executed.

Further, in the suggestion effect processing of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the second embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. 67, step S3502 and thereafter, in the suggestive effect process described with reference to FIG. After S3705, an effect is performed to prompt the player to accept the operation. In the presentation prompting the player to accept the operation, for example, an image or video prompting the player to operate the operation button 35 is displayed on the display screen G (for example, the image of the operation button 35 is displayed together with the characters "Press!"). ), or a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C. Also, an image or video prompting the user to operate the operation button 35 may be displayed on the display screen G, and a voice saying "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speakers 26A to 26C.

[Another modification of the second embodiment]
In the above-described second embodiment, by adding the "fall result" to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 62(b)) stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 of the main controller 300, Although an embodiment in which a drop lottery is performed has been described, the drop random number counter C5 for the drop lottery is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313, and the MPU 302 uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS to internally control the random number counter C5. A lottery (jackpot lottery, fall lottery, etc.) or the like may be executed. The counter C5 is a loop counter that adds (increments) 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching a predetermined maximum value. A random number initial value counter CINI may be used to set the initial value of the falling random number counter C5. Here, the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS have been explained in the first embodiment, so overlapping explanations will be omitted.

In the modified example of this embodiment, the fall random number counter C5 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the falling random number counter C5 is stored in the RAM 313 as acquisition information storage means at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. A falling lottery from the variable probability state to the normal state is executed based on the value of the falling random number counter C5 stored in the ball storage area (see FIG. 18) and stored in the reserved ball storage area. Also in the present embodiment, the values of the random numbers for winning the fall are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 312 provided as success/failure information group storage means.

Further, the MPU 302 of the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment clears the variable probability flags in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 313 when the drop lottery is won, thereby changing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 from the variable probability state to the normal state. state, and transmits a fall command indicating that it has fallen to the sound emission control device 400 . The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 generates, at a predetermined timing, an effect suggesting the possibility that the state of the pachinko machine 10 has fallen from the variable probability state to the normal state based on the fall command transmitted from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300. Run with As for the suggestive effect in the sound emission control device 400, in each suggestive effect process described with reference to FIGS. ?” (whether or not a fall command transmitted from main controller 300 has been received).

A fall random number counter C5 for a fall lottery is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313, and the MPU 302 uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS to perform an internal lottery (jackpot lottery, fall lottery, etc.). etc., the fall lottery may be performed before the big win lottery, or the fall lottery may be performed after the big win lottery. When the drop lottery is performed before the jackpot lottery, the jackpot lottery is performed after the game state changes from the probability variable state to the normal state when the fall lottery is won. For this reason, the player plays the game while worrying that the game state will fall to the normal state, so that the player can get a feeling of nervousness. On the other hand, when the falling lottery is performed after the big winning lottery, the falling lottery is performed after the big winning lottery is performed in the variable probability state in which the game state is advantageous.

In addition, in the present embodiment and modifications, the high-frequency support mode provided after the jackpot game, when the number of games (same as the number of fluctuations) reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times), low frequency Switch to support mode. In other words, in the present embodiment and modifications, the high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played is 100. However, the number of games played in the high frequency support mode is not limited to 100 times. For example, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of games played may be less than 100, or may be 101 or more.

In addition, even if the number of games (same as the number of fluctuations) exceeds 100 in the high-frequency support mode provided after the jackpot game, the high-frequency support mode may be continued until the falling lottery is won. . In this case, when the drop lottery is won with the number of games exceeding 100, the high-frequency support mode ends. That is, when the high-frequency support mode is continued until the drop lottery is won, the player wins the drop lottery and the game state falls from the high-probability state to the normal state by the end of the high-frequency support mode. can recognize that For this reason, if the falling lottery is won in a state where the number of games exceeds 100 times in the high-frequency support mode granted after the jackpot game, it suggests that the game state has fallen from the variable probability state to the normal state. It is preferable to configure so as not to execute the suggestion effect to be performed.

Although the player can recognize that the game state has fallen from the high-probability state to the normal state, if the above suggestive effect is executed, the player may be emotionally hurt or feel frustrated. It is not desirable because it becomes an act of rubbing salt on the wound. Also, if the player is emotionally hurt or becomes irritated, there is a risk that the player will stop playing the game. However, as described above, when the number of games exceeds 100 times in the high-frequency support mode given after the jackpot game, and the falling lottery is won, the game state falls from the variable probability state to the normal state. By structuring so as not to execute the suggestive performance suggesting that the game has been played, the player is prevented from being emotionally hurt or irritated, and the player can comfortably continue the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a game board 81 having a game area on which game balls roll, and when a game ball passes through a specific area (first start opening 84a, second start opening 84b) of the game area 104, A big win lottery means (MPU 302) for performing a big win lottery to decide whether to shift to a big win game state advantageous to the player, and a probability variable state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous as a game state according to the result of the game. , a game state control means (MPU 302) for controlling a normal state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is lower than the variable probability state; MPU 302), and effect control means (MPU 402, sound emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) that executes a performance suggesting the result of the falling lottery at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the player can know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state by the effect. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a player who is bored from quitting the game because the player's expectation for the big win cannot be sustained despite the variable probability state. Further, when the player falls to the normal state, the player can recognize that the player is in the normal state, so that the player can play the game without having strange expectations. Thus, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

(2) The performance control means (MPU 402, sound emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 executes a performance suggesting the result of the fall lottery when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means (MPU 302) is won. . Therefore, the player can immediately know that he/she has fallen. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not to continue the game even after winning the drop lottery and the lottery probability is not in an advantageous variable probability state. In addition, since the player can immediately know that he or she has fallen, the player can avoid wasting game balls when not continuing the game. In addition, when continuing the game, the player can continue the game after knowing that the lottery probability is not an advantageous variable probability state, but can continue the game, which is highly convincing.

[Third embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine 10 having a dedicated speaker unit for notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Game board 81>
FIG. 70 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a speaker section 26D on the upper right portion of the front side of the game board 81 for notifying that the front door frame 14 is opened. As shown in FIG. 70, the speaker section 26D is provided outside the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to interfere with the game. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is positioned so that the inner frame 13 does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 on the rear side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the back side of the game board 81 (the side on which the back pack unit 15 is provided)). A speaker unit 26E is provided for notifying that the is opened. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 81 included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 7, and redundant description will be omitted.

In addition, the speaker part 26</b>D does not need to move as the front door frame 14 is rotated when the front door frame 14 is opened. In other words, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the direction in which the sound of the speaker section 26D is output should not face the right or left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat. Therefore, the location where the speaker section 26D is provided is not limited to the upper right portion of the game board 81, but may be provided in the upper left portion or the lower left portion of the game board 81. FIG. It should be noted that, even in this case, it is preferable to provide it outside the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to hinder the game. Alternatively, the speaker section 26D may be provided on the front surface of the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13. FIG.

In addition, since the speaker unit 26E is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13 (game board 81), when the inner frame 13 is opened, it moves along with the rotation of the inner frame 13, but the sound of the speaker unit 26E can be heard. The direction of output does not face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound. The place where the speaker section 26E is provided is not limited to the upper right portion on the back side of the game board 81, but may be provided in the upper left portion or the lower left portion on the back side of the game board 81. Even in this case, it is preferable to provide it at a position that does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 or the like supported on the back side of the game board 81 .

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 400 and Display Control Device 500>
FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes speaker units 26D and 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened as described above. It is connected to the output port of the sound emission control board 401 . More specifically, the speaker units 26D and 26E are connected to the output port of the DAC 403d of the sound output LSI 403 provided on the sound emission control board 401. FIG. The DAC 403d converts the digital musical tone data or the digital synthesized musical tone data created by the sound data processing section 403c into an analog signal, amplifies it, and then outputs it to the speaker sections 26D and 26E.

FIG. 72 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d and the speaker units 26A to 26E provided in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
In the example shown in FIG. 72(a), the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and three amplifier circuits that amplify the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. 403d2a, an amplifier circuit 403d2d and an amplifier circuit 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e. is output to the speaker unit 26E.

In the example shown in FIG. 72(a), the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment uses a common amplifier circuit 403d2a to amplify analog signals to be output to the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
In the example shown in FIG. 72(a), the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, The analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output to the speaker section 26E, so that the speaker sections 26A to 26C, the speaker section 26D, and the speaker section 26E have different amplifier circuits. As in the example shown in FIG. 72(b), the DAC 403d has only one amplifier circuit, and the selector 403f is arranged after the amplifier circuit 403d2 so that the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2 is output to the speaker unit. 26A to 26C, the speaker section 26D, or the speaker section 26E. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be further reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be further reduced.

In the present embodiment, the program for executing the abnormality notification process and the processing data stored in the ROM 412 are reproduced by the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, and the speaker unit 26E, in other words, the amplifier circuit 403d2a, the amplification circuit 403d2d, and the amplification circuit 403d2e may be set to the same parameter data. The parameter data may be defined so that the amplification factors of the circuits 403d2d and 403d2e are higher than the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the dedicated speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 is opened on the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13, so that the front door frame 14 is opened. In this case, the direction of the speaker section 26D does not face the right side or the left side of the upper half of the body of the player playing in the adjacent seat. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a dedicated speaker part 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 is opened on the back side of the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13, and when the inner frame 13 is opened Moreover, the direction of the speaker part 26E does not face the right or left side of the upper half of the body of the player playing in the adjacent seat. Therefore, when notifying that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 have been opened from the speaker units 26D and 26E, there is no need to reduce the reproduction volume of the dedicated speaker units 26D and 26E, and the player is notified that the player is in an abnormal state. The fear that the notification sound is bothersome is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. The operation of the abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment is substantially the same as the operation of the abnormality notification process in the first embodiment, but there are some differences, so please refer to FIG. The operation of the abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to .

When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes abnormality notification processing to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S3801, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If the MPU 402 determines in step S3801 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S3804. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3801 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S3802. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S3803, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading out the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . Here, since the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in the closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the volume output from the speaker units 26D and 26E is small outside the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, it is preferable that the anomaly notification at the time of power recovery be performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, parameters are defined so that an abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the parameters are defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E are defined to be zero, and the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e are zero.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26D and 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E becomes zero. In the case of muting, the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e may be short-circuited (connected to GND), or an output-open circuit may be used in which the inputs to the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e are cut off by a selector or the like. good too.

When an abnormality is reported from the speakers 26D and 26E, as described above, the abnormality is reported when power is restored when the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). , 26E is reduced outside the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Therefore, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E may be increased when the abnormality is notified when power is restored. In this case, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e of the speaker sections 26D and 26E for anomaly notification at the time of power recovery becomes larger than the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e for the speaker section 26D and 26E for anomaly notification at normal times. It suffices to define the parameters as follows.

In step S3804, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3804 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processes after step S3811, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3804 that the normal notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the normal notification command to the display control device 500 in step S3805. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S3806, the MPU 402 determines whether the received normal time notification command is due to the opening of the front door frame 14 or not. If the result of determination in step S3806 is that the front door frame 14 is opened (YES), the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification of opening the front door frame in step S3807. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program for opening the front door frame, the processing data, the light emission data, and the sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 . Here, in the present embodiment, the parameters are defined so that when the front door frame 14 is open, the abnormality is notified from the speaker section 26D. Specifically, the parameters are defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26D is a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2d is a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker sections 26A to 26C and 26E is set to a predetermined value. is zero, and the parameters are defined so that the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2e are zero. Further, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26A to 26C and 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C and 26E becomes zero. In the case of muting, an output short type circuit that short-circuits (connects to GND) the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2e may be used. It may be a circuit of the type. Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 72(b), when only one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be set to the speaker unit 26D by the selector 403f.

Moreover, when the determination result in step S3806 is not due to the opening of the front door frame 14 (NO), the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification for opening the inner frame in step S3808. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data for normal time notification for opening the inner frame, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 . Here, in the present embodiment, parameters are defined so that when the inner frame 13 is opened, the abnormality is notified from the speaker section 26E. Specifically, parameters are defined so that the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26E becomes a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker sections 26A to 26D is zero. The parameters are defined so that the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2d are zero. Further, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped during normal notification.

Note that the reproduction of the speaker units 26A to 26D may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26D becomes zero. In the case of muting, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2d may be used. It may be a type circuit. Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 72(b), when only one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be set to the speaker unit 26E by the selector 403f.

In step S3809, the MPU 402 performs processing to stop BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When resuming the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is canceled, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts reproducing the BGM from the address, thereby resuming the reproduction from the position where the BGM was stopped. can be done.
When muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so as not to output the sound without stopping the reproduction of the BGM. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3810, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S3803, step S3807, or step S3808 and emitting light. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S3803, step S3807, or step S3808, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E notify an abnormality (for example, "The door was opened while the power supply was cut off!" at the time of power recovery, and "The door was It is open!” and the output of a warning sound) is started. Also, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data and light emission data read out in step S3803, step S3807 or step S3808. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S3811, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If the MPU 402 determines in step S3811 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S3813. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S3811 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S3812 the MPU 402 outputs the speaker unit 26D (when the front door frame 14 is opened) or A sound to reduce the playback volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26E (when the inner frame 13 is opened) (audio such as “The door is open!” The output LSI 403 is instructed. The sound output LSI 403 performs control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker section 26D or the speaker section 26E based on the instruction from the MPU 402 .

In step S3813, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3811 that the door open notification canceling command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S3814.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S3813 that the door open notification cancel command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the door open notification cancel command to the display control device 500 in step S3814. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.
In step S3815, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker unit 26D or the speaker unit 26E based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, when power is restored, "The door was opened while the power was off!", If it is a normal time, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S3815, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3816, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification cancellation command, in other words, sets the value of the flag to 0. . In step S3817, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S3809. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM was stopped in step S3809, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructs the sound output LSI 403 to resume the reproduction of the BGM from that address, thereby stopping the BGM. Playback resumes from the position. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S3809, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S3809, the BGM (including music and sound for production) is stopped or muted. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S3810, when reproducing (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S3803, step S3807, or S3808, the reproduction volume of the voice or warning sound is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. can be processed. Further, in step S3809, if the volume is decreased gradually or step by step while the BGM is being played without stopping, in step S3815, an abnormality notification from the speaker unit D or the speaker unit 26E is performed. is decreased gradually or in steps until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S3817, when resuming the reproduction of the BGM, the reproduction volume of the BGM is gradually decreased or stepwise to a predetermined value. may be raised. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

Further, in the above description, it is determined in step S3811 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S3812 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like from the speaker section D or the speaker section 26E is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. It is highly probable that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In this case, the warning sound is reduced (two-stage control). As a result, there is no need to listen to a loud warning sound indefinitely during maintenance, etc., which requires time, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat or a maintenance worker will be bothered by the abnormality warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. It should be noted that the processing of steps S3811 and S3812 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15. - 特許庁

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes the speaker section 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 is opened. It may be used not only as a part but also as a shared speaker part with the speaker part 26A.
FIG. 74 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a modification of the third embodiment; When the speaker section 26D is used not only as a speaker section for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened, but also as a speaker section shared with the speaker section 26A, as shown in FIG. 74, the front door frame 14 is closed ( The sound reproduced by the speaker section 26D is attenuated by providing a region 14c having a plurality of through holes in the region (mesh portion in FIG. 74) of the front door frame 14 at a position facing the speaker section 26D when closed). It is preferable to make it difficult to

FIG. 75 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC and the speaker section provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the modification of the present embodiment.
In the modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. and three amplifier circuits 403d2a, 403d2d and 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26B and 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output. is output to the speaker section 26E.

73, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26D. The parameters of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process are specified so that the amplification factor of the circuit 403d2d becomes a predetermined value. The parameters of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process are defined so that the reproduction volume becomes zero and the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2e become zero. ing.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26E becomes zero. In the case of muting, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2e may be used. It may be a circuit of the type.

In addition, when the inner frame 13 is opened in the abnormality notification at the normal time described with reference to FIG. 73, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26E. 403d2e, the amplification factor of 403d2e becomes a predetermined value. The parameters of the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process are defined so that the sound volume becomes zero and the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2d become zero. there is

The reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26D may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26D becomes zero. In the case of muting, an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the outputs of the amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2d may be used. It may be a type circuit.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light. , 23B may not emit light, the power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Also, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, one of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, It may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification processing. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who is playing a game in the adjacent seat will find the lighting of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B annoying. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat will lose the exhilaration and immersion feeling and lose interest in the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a first frame (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable with respect to a fixed frame (outer frame 11) and a second frame that is openable and closable with respect to the first frame. (front door frame 14), a first acoustic device (speaker sections 26D and 26E) provided on the first frame, and a plurality of second acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C) provided on the second frame. a detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) for detecting the opening of the first and second frames; and when the detection device detects the opening of the first frame or the second frame. Abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) for controlling the first audio device to notify abnormality. That is, the first acoustic device is provided on the first frame and does not rotate together with the opened second frame. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound from the first acoustic device is not output to the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

(2) The detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) of the pachinko machine 10 include a first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects opening of the first frame (inner frame 13), and a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) that detects opening of the second frame (front door frame 14). Therefore, even when either of the first and second frames is opened, the opening can be detected and an abnormality can be notified.

(3) The first frame (inner frame 13) of the pachinko machine 10 has a game board (game board 81) on which game balls flow down, and the first sound device (speaker units 26D, 26E) It is provided on the game board of the body (inner frame 13). For this reason, the degree of freedom of the arrangement position (layout) of the first acoustic device is improved. Also, since it is attached to the game board, it is easy to attach the first acoustic device.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, a cover member that attenuates the notification sound is provided, and the cover member controls any one of the plurality of speaker portions 26A to 26C. The pachinko machine 10 is designed to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game next to the player may feel annoyed by the abnormal notification sound by making the reproduction volume of one or more notification sounds smaller than the notification sound reproduction volume of another acoustic device. will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Schematic configuration of speaker unit and cover member provided in game machine>
FIG. 76 is a schematic configuration diagram of the speaker section 26A and the cover member 27 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 76B is a front view of a state in which the speaker section 26A is covered with the cover member 27 (hereinafter also referred to as a second state), and FIG. , and FIG. 76(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 76(b), and a cross-sectional view taken along line YY in FIG. 76(b).

The cover member 27 includes a plate-like first member 27a (surface member) facing the speaker section 26A in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 10, and a bottom side to a back side (back side) of the first member 27a. A plate-like second member 27b (lower side member) extending in the direction of the plate-like member 27b (lower side member), and a plate-like member extending in the direction from the upper side of the first member 27a to the back side (back side) and facing the second member 27b. and a plate that extends in the direction from the left side of the first member 27a to the back side (back side) and connects the left side sides of the second member 27b and the third member 27c The fourth member 27d (left side member) is a box-shaped member with an open right side. Further, the second member 27b of the cover member 27 is provided with a slide gear 27e that meshes with a driving gear 30a of the cover member driving section 30, which will be described later.

An origin projection 27f1 for the origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27, and a projection for the maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided at the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27. is provided with a maximum point projection 27f2. Here, an origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the position of the origin projection 27f1 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the first state (origin position). A maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided at the position of the maximum point projection 27f2 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the second state (maximum point position).

In the present embodiment, a rack-and-opinion system is adopted as a configuration for driving the cover member 27. The cover member 27 is placed near the cover member 27, and the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27. A cover member driving section 30 is provided for changing between a first state (origin position) in which the speaker section 26A is not closed and a second state (maximum point position) in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27.
The cover member drive unit 30 includes a cover member drive motor (not shown) and a drive gear 30a which is a gear. When the cover member drive motor is driven, the cover member drive unit 30 meshes with the slide gear 27e of the cover member 27. The drive gear 30a rotates to drive the cover member 27, and the position of the cover member 27 changes between the first state and the second state.

The cover member driving motor is, for example, a stepping motor, and is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the driving gear 30a at a predetermined step angle. A DC motor or the like with an encoder for detecting the amount of rotation may be used instead of the stepping motor. A drive mechanism for the cover member 27 can be constructed at a lower cost than a stepping motor.

The slide gear 27e is tooth-cut on the second member of the cover member 27, is meshed with the drive gear 30a, and is capable of reciprocating in the left-right direction as the drive gear 30a rotates. . Therefore, by rotating the drive gear 30a step by step by the cover member drive motor, the slide gear 27e is moved in the left and right direction by steps. It can be driven in the range up to the position.

Two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 are formed on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14 so as to protrude toward the front side. The two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 are spaced apart by a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the speaker portion 26A. These two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 cooperate with the cover member 27 to guide the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A to the opening portion 14d formed on the right side surface of the front door frame 14. function as That is, in the first state where the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A is transmitted from the area 14c provided on the front side of the front door frame 14 to the front of the front door frame 14. radiated towards On the other hand, in the second state where the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A is transmitted through the guide path 14e formed by the cover member 27 and the rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 to the front door frame. The light is guided to an opening 14 d formed on the right side of the front door frame 14 and radiated from the opening 14 d of the front door frame 14 toward the right side of the front door frame 14 .

<Schematic configuration of origin detection sensor>
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor.
Next, referring to FIG. 77, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 28 will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 28. As shown in FIG. Note that the maximum point detection sensor 29 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 28, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 28 includes a light-emitting element mounting portion 28a to which a light-emitting element (not shown) is mounted, a light-receiving element mounting portion 28b to which a light-receiving element (not shown) is mounted, and one end of the light-emitting element mounting portion 28a. It is a U-shaped sensor composed of one end of a light receiving element mounting portion 28b and a connecting portion 28c that connects the light emitting element and the light receiving element so that they are arranged facing each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A detection groove 28d is formed by the portion 28a, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b, and the connecting portion 28c.

If there is no insert (origin projection 27f1) in the detection groove 28d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attachment portion 28a is directly received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attachment portion 28b. be. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 28d, the light emitted from the light-emitting element attached to the light-emitting element mounting portion 28a is blocked, and the light is received by the light-receiving element attached to the light-receiving element mounting portion 28b. Can not. The origin detection sensor 28 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an on signal when the light is not received. It can be determined whether an insert has been inserted.

In the origin detection sensor 28, the light emitting element mounting portion 28a is disposed on the front side when viewed from the front, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b is disposed on the rear side when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 28c is disposed on the bottom side when viewed from the front. The origin projection 27f1 provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 is inserted into the detection groove 28d so that light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. there is Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 28 detects that the light emitted from the light-emitting element to the light-receiving element is blocked, by outputting an ON signal from the origin detection sensor 28, the audio light emission control device 400 can It can be determined that the cover member 27 has reached the origin position.

The maximum point detection sensor 29 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 28, the cover member 27 is at the maximum point position, and the maximum point projection provided on the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 27f2 is inserted into the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 29 so as to block the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 29 detects that the light emitted from the light-emitting element to the light-receiving element is blocked, the maximum point detection sensor 29 outputs an on-signal, whereby the audio light emission control device 400 can determine that the cover member 27 has reached the maximum point position.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device and Display Control Device>
FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 . The origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are connected to the input ports of the sound emission control board 401 , and the ON signals output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are sent to the sound emission control board 401 . is entered. The MPU 402 is in a state (first state) in which the cover member 27 is at the origin position, in other words, the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 by the ON signals output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29. or whether the cover member 27 is at the maximum position, in other words, whether the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27 (second state).

Also, the cover member driving section 30 is connected to the output port of the sound emission control board 401 . The cover member driving section 30 drives the cover member 27 between the origin position and the maximum point position based on the control signal from the MPU 402 input via the output port of the sound emission control board 401, and the speaker section 26A is activated. A first state in which the cover member 27 is not covered and a second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27 are changed.

In this embodiment, since the reproduction sound output from the speaker section 26A is attenuated by the cover member 27, unlike the first embodiment, the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in the DAC 403d stored in the ROM 412 is does not differ between the speaker section 26A and the speaker sections 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters stored in the ROM 412 that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in the DAC 403d are the same or substantially the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

<Connection relationship between DAC and speaker unit provided in sound output LSI>
FIG. 79 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d provided in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment and the speaker units 26A to 26C.
In the example shown in FIG. 79, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing section into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the cover member 27 attenuates the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A, the analog signal output to the speaker sections 26A to 26C can be amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2. , there is no need to prepare different amplifier circuits for the speaker units 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be reduced, and the arithmetic processing load of the MPU 402 can be reduced because there is no need to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the common amplifier circuit 403d2 amplifies the analog signals to be output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the It is not necessary to prepare parameter data defining the reproduction volume of the processing data for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C ( In this embodiment, the speaker section 26A) or the cover member 27 provided in the vicinity thereof changes from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the speaker portion 26A is attenuated by the cover member 27 and becomes small. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormal notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the pachinko machine 10 being played due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion caused by the music and voices output from the pachinko machine 10 are lost. This reduces the risk that the player will lose interest in the game.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes abnormality notification processing to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S3901, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3901 that the command for notifying when the power is restored has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S3904. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3901 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S3902. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S3903, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power restoration notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts to read the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 . Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat will feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. For this reason, the MPU 402 performs the abnormality notification without driving the cover member 27 from the origin position to the maximum point position when the power is restored. In other words, the MPU 402 gives the abnormality notification in the first state in which the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 . As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated forward of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S3904, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3904 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processes after step S3910, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3904 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), in step S3905 the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving section 30 to shift the position of the cover member 27 from the origin position. Drive to the maximum point position. In other words, the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving section 30 to change from the first state in which the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 to the second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27. Let As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S<b>3906 , the MPU 402 transmits a normal notification command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S3907, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . Here, light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S3908, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When resuming the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is canceled, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts reproducing the BGM from the address, thereby resuming the reproduction from the position where the BGM was stopped. can be done.
When muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so as not to output the sound without stopping the reproduction of the BGM. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3909, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S3903 or S3907 and emitting light. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S3903 or S3907, and sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound data to the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when the power is restored, a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and output of warning sound) is started. Also, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data, and light emission data read out in step S3903 or S3907. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S3910, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S3910 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S3912. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3910 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S3911 the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (normal notification) output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is instructed to reduce the reproduction volume of the output of a voice such as "The door is open!" The sound output LSI 403, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, performs control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S3911 may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the seat on the left side when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is reduced. can be controlled to In step S3911, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be small, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. The parameters are updated to those of the case, and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits of the speaker sections 26A to 26C is reduced, thereby reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker sections 26A to 26C. When performing control to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker section 26A. (In this case, the speaker section 26A is provided with a dedicated amplifier circuit).

In step S3912, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If the MPU 402 determines in step S3912 that the door open notification cancel command has not been received (NO), it terminates the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S3913.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S3912 that the door open notification cancel command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving section 30 to move the cover member 27 to the position in step S3913. is driven from the maximum point position to the origin position. In other words, the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving section 30 to change from the second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered by the cover member 27 to the first state in which the speaker section 26A is not covered by the cover member 27. Let As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated forward of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S<b>3914 , the MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S3915, the MPU 402 issues an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was off!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S3915, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3916, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification cancellation command, in other words, sets the value of the flag to 0. . In step S3917, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to resume the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S3908. The sound output LSI 403 restarts reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM was stopped in step S3908, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructs the sound output LSI 403 to resume the reproduction of the BGM from that address, thereby stopping the BGM. Playback resumes from the position. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S3908, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S3908, the processing of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for production) is performed. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S3909, when playing back (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S3903 or step S3907, processing is performed so that the playback volume of the voice or warning sound gradually decreases or gradually rises to a predetermined value. You may Further, in step S3908, if the volume is decreased gradually or in stages while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S3915, the abnormality notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or nearly zero, and in step S3917, when the BGM playback is resumed, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

Further, in the above description, it is determined in step S3910 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S3911 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. It is highly probable that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. It should be noted that the processing of steps S3910 and S3911 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15. - 特許庁

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 supports the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. When the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, they are opened by rotating forward (toward the player) with the supporting side as the rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player who plays in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the second state in which the speaker section 26A is covered with the cover member 27 is used when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, the cover member 27, the cover member drive section 30, the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are provided near the speaker section 26B, and the rib sections 14b1 and 14b2 forming the guideway 14e are formed. 2, the speaker portion 26B is covered with the cover member 27 when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified. In this case, an opening 14d is formed in the left side surface of the front door frame 14 so that the notification sound is emitted from the left side surface of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right and left sides (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided, and this detector The second state in which either the speaker section 26A or the speaker section 26B is covered with the cover member 27 may be established based on the detection result in .

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 13 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the left. For this reason, when notifying an abnormality that the door is open, the speaker section 26A is in the second state covered with the cover member 27, and an alarm sound and voice are reproduced to notify the abnormality.
Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. For this reason, when notifying an abnormality that the door is open, the speaker section 26B is in the second state covered with the cover member 27, and an alarm sound and voice are reproduced to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path 14e is formed on the right side of the speaker portion 26A, and the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14, but the speaker portion The direction in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced by 26A is radiated may be any direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14. For example, the guidance path 14e is formed above the speaker section 26A and reproduced by the speaker section 26A. A configuration may be adopted in which the abnormality notification sound is radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14 . When the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, the guide path 14e is formed on the left side of the speaker section 26B, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced by the speaker section 26B. A guide path 14e may be formed above the speaker section 26B so that the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker section 26B is radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. It is good also as a structure.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light. , 23B may not emit light, the power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, one of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably the display lamp device on the opening side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, It may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification processing. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who is playing a game in the adjacent seat will find the lighting of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B annoying. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat will lose the exhilaration and immersion feeling and lose interest in the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of sound devices (speaker units) provided in the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, a plurality of sound devices notify an abnormality. Abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403), one or more of a plurality of sound devices or provided in the vicinity thereof, having a first state in which the sound device is not covered and a second state in which the sound device is covered A cover member (cover member 27) and drive means (cover member drive section 30) for changing the cover member from the first state to the second state when the detection device detects the opening of the frame. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the acoustic device (speaker portion 26A) is attenuated and reduced by the cover member (cover member 27). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormal notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

(2) When the pachinko machine 10 is in the second state covering the sound device (speaker section 26A), the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device (speaker section 26A or speaker sections 26B and 26C) is set to the frame body (inner frame 13. It has a guideway (14b) that guides in a direction other than the front of the front door frame 14). For this reason, when the cover member (cover member 27) is in the second state covering the sound device, the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device is guided by the guideway in a direction other than the front of the frame, for example, the pachinko machine 10 side. direction (side surface side), upward (top side), and downward (bottom side). Therefore, when the frame body of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, the possibility that the player positioned in front of the player is annoyed by the abnormal notification sound is reduced. In addition, since the induced anomaly notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the risk that the hall operator or employees will miss the anomaly notification.

(3) The frame (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported on either the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with either the right side or the left side as the supporting side. The cover member (cover member 27) is arranged on a side of a plurality of sound devices (speaker portions 26A to 26C) different from the support side (speaker portion 26A or speaker portions 26B, 26C) or its located nearby. Therefore, the cover member 27 reduces the sound volume of the sound device arranged on the side different from the supporting side of the frame, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the player when the frame is opened. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the anomaly notification sound to the player sitting in the adjacent seat. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine that are being played due to abnormal notifications, and the exhilaration and sense of immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine can be suppressed more effectively. This further reduces the risk that the player will be distracted by being caught.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, by changing the direction of the speaker unit, output from one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C changes the radiation direction of the reproduced sound. A pachinko machine 10 that reduces the possibility that a player playing a game in an adjacent seat will be bothered by an abnormal notification sound will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Schematic configuration of speaker unit and cover member provided in gaming machine>
FIG. 81 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ in FIG. 81, and shows a schematic configuration diagram showing the speaker section provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment and its peripheral structure. FIG. 82(a) is a partially cross-sectional plan view showing a first state in which the speaker section 26A faces the front of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 82(c) is a partially cross-sectional plan view showing the middle of changing from the front to the right side of the frame 14), and FIG. It is a partially cross-sectional plan view showing two states. As shown in FIG. 82, the speaker section 26A includes a cone paper 26a and a cone paper vibrating section 26b, and is configured to be rotatable about a rotating shaft 26c by a speaker section driving section 26d.

When the game is being played without an abnormality or when an abnormality is reported when power is restored, the speaker section 26A is arranged such that the cone paper 26a is in front of the front door frame 14 (front side), as shown in FIG. 82(a). ), and through the region 14c formed in the region on the front side of the front door frame 14 facing the speaker portion 26A, BGM, sound effects, and an abnormality notification (for example, “Power off The door has been opened inside!” etc.) is output toward the front of the front door frame 14 (player).

On the other hand, in normal-time anomaly notification, a normal-time notification command to that effect is output from main control device 300 to sound emission control device 400 . The sound emission control device 400 outputs a signal for generating an abnormality notification to the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the reception of the normal time notification command, and outputs a drive signal to the speaker unit driving unit 26d, The speaker part 26A is rotated counterclockwise (CCW) around the rotating shaft 26c and controlled to face the right side of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the speaker section 26A rotates counterclockwise around the rotating shaft 26c. Finally, as shown in FIG. 82(c), the speaker section 26A It is in a state of being rotated about 90 degrees, in other words, a state in which the speaker portion 26A faces the right side of the front door frame 14 (second state). In this state, a normal notification (for example, "The door is open while the power is off!" 14 to the right (the direction away from the player).

Here, the speaker section driving section 26d is composed of, for example, a stepping motor, and is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the speaker section 26A at a predetermined step angle. A DC motor or the like with an encoder for detecting the amount of rotation may be used instead of the stepping motor. A drive mechanism for the speaker section 26A can be configured at a lower cost than a stepping motor.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, a speaker portion 26A is formed on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14 so as to protrude toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Two rib portions may be formed to provide a guide path for guiding the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A to the opening portion 14d formed on the right side surface of the front door frame 14. FIG. By providing the guide path in this way, it is possible to reduce the component radiated to the front side of the front door frame 14 in the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A in normal abnormality notification.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device and Display Control Device>
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the speaker driving section 26d that changes the direction of the speaker section 26A. The speaker unit driving unit 26d is connected to the output port of the sound emission control board 401. FIG. Based on the control signal from the MPU 402 that is input via the output port of the sound emission control board 401, the speaker drive unit 26d changes the direction of the speaker unit 26A between the first state in which it faces the front of the front door frame 14 and the front state. It is changed between a second state in which the door frame 14 faces away from the front.

In this embodiment, the direction of the speaker portion 26A is changed from the first state in which the speaker portion driving portion 26d faces the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state in which the direction of the speaker portion 26A faces away from the front of the front door frame 14. , unlike the first embodiment, the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the DAC 403d stored in the ROM 412 does not differ between the speaker section 26A and the speaker sections 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters stored in the ROM 412 that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in the DAC 403d are the same or substantially the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

<Connection relationship between DAC and speaker unit provided in sound output LSI>
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, different amplifier circuits are prepared for the speaker sections 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment in order to change the radiation direction of the reproduced sound output from the speaker section 26A by the speaker section driving section 26d. you don't have to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described with reference to FIG. A DAC circuit 403d that converts a signal into an analog signal and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d are provided. be. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare different amplifier circuits for the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be reduced, and the arithmetic processing load of the MPU 402 can be reduced because there is no need to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

Further, in this embodiment, since the common amplifier circuit 403d2a amplifies the analog signals to be output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the program and process stored in the ROM 412 for executing the abnormality notification process It is not necessary to prepare parameter data for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C, which defines the reproduction volume of the data for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, the speaker driving section 26d drives one of the plurality of speaker sections 26A to 26C. Any one or more (the speaker unit 26A in this embodiment) of the first state facing forward of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14 (right side in this embodiment) change to Therefore, the abnormality notification sound is not output to the player positioned in front of the frame, in other words, to the player playing in the adjacent seat. As a result, the possibility that the player will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormal notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes abnormality notification processing to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S4001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S4001 that the command for notifying when the power has been restored has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processing from step S4004. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4001 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S4002. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S4003, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading out the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, the player playing in the adjacent seat is less likely to feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. For this reason, the MPU 402 performs the abnormality notification without changing the direction of the speaker unit 26A from the first state to the second state in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated forward of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S4004, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S4004 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4010, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4004 that it has received the normal notification command (YES), in step S4005, the MPU 402 controls the speaker drive unit 26d to direct the speaker unit 26A to the front door frame. 14 is changed to a second state in which the front door frame 14 faces away from the front (right side in this embodiment). As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S<b>4006 , the MPU 402 transmits a normal notification command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S4007, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for normal notification from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . Here, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped during normal notification.

In step S4008, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When resuming the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is canceled, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts reproducing the BGM from the address, thereby resuming the reproduction from the position where the BGM was stopped. can be done.
When muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so as not to output the sound without stopping the reproduction of the BGM. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4009, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S4003 or S4007 and emitting light. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S4003 or S4007, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound data to the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output from ~26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, when the power is restored, a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and output of warning sound) is started. Also, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data, and light emission data read out in step S4003 or S4007. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S4010, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit open command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the back pack unit open command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . If the MPU 402 determines in step S4010 that the back pack unit open command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S4012. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4010 that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), in step S4011 the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (normal notification) output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. It instructs the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the reproduction volume of the output of a voice such as "The door is open!" The sound output LSI 403, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, performs control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, the control to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S4011 may be controlled to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C. Of the parts 26A to 26C, only a specific speaker part, for example, the speaker part 26A, which is closest to the ears of the player playing in the seat on the left side when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, is reduced in volume. can be controlled to In step S4011, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to decrease, the sound output LSI 403 sets the parameters that define the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the back pack unit 15. The parameters are updated to those of the case, and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits of the speaker sections 26A to 26C is reduced, thereby reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker sections 26A to 26C. When performing control to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker section 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker section 26A. to control.

In step S4012, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S4012 that the door open notification cancellation command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S4013.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S4012 that it has received the door open notification cancellation command (YES), the MPU 402 controls the speaker drive unit 26d in step S4013 to open the front door frame 14. The direction of the speaker part 26A is changed (returned) from the second state facing away from the front to the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker portion 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated forward of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG.

In step S<b>4014 , the MPU 402 transmits a door open notification cancellation command to the display control device 500 . In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S4015, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened during power shutdown!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
In step S4015, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4017, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification cancellation command, in other words, sets the value of the flag to 0. . In step S4018, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S4008. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM was stopped in step S4008, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from that address, thereby stopping the BGM. Playback resumes from the position. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S4008, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S4008, the BGM (including music and sound for effect) is stopped or muted. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. In this case, in step S4009, when playing back (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S4003 or step S4007, processing is performed so that the playback volume of the voice or warning sound is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may Further, in step S4008, if the volume is decreased gradually or in stages while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S4015, the abnormality notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or approximately zero, and in step S4017, when the BGM playback is resumed, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification without causing a sense of incongruity caused by suddenly stopping the BGM and replacing it with a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incongruity due to the change to BGM.

In the above description, it is determined in step S4010 whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), the process of step S4011 is executed. Then, the reproduction volume of the warning sound or the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must be opened after the inner frame 13 is opened, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15. It is highly probable that the opening is due to maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside, and that the back pack unit 15 is opened to perform maintenance, etc. Since it takes time to do so, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the back pack unit open command is received, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is opened. In such a case, a configuration (two-stage control) is adopted in which the warning sound or the like is reduced. As a result, there is no need to hear a loud warning sound indefinitely during time-consuming maintenance or the like, and the possibility that a player playing a game in the next seat will be bothered by the abnormal warning sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like. It should be noted that the processing of steps S4010 and S4011 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15. - 特許庁

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 supports the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. When the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, they are opened by rotating forward (toward the player) with the supporting side as the rotation axis. For this reason, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left, and the speaker section 26A is opened to face the player playing in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified, the direction of the speaker unit 26A is changed from the first state in which the direction of the speaker unit 26A faces the front of the front door frame 14 to the front of the front door frame 14. It is changed to a second state facing away.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, the orientation of the speaker portion 26B is changed from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing away from the front of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right side and left side (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided, and this detector , the orientation of the speaker section 26A or the speaker section 26B is changed from the first state in which the front door frame 14 faces forward to the second state in which the front door frame 14 faces other than the front.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 13 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the left. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the direction of the speaker part 26A is changed from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14. change.
Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. For this reason, when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified, the direction of the speaker portion 26B is changed from the first state in which it faces the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state in which it faces other than the front of the front door frame 14. change.

Further, in the present embodiment, by changing the direction of the speaker portion 26A to the right side of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. However, the direction in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A is emitted may be any direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14. For example, the direction of the speaker portion 26A is changed to the upper side of the front door frame 14. By doing so, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26A may be radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14 . In addition, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, by changing the direction of the speaker section 26B to the left side of the front door frame 14, the sound is reproduced by the speaker section 26B. The abnormality notification sound may be emitted toward the left side of the front door frame 14, and by changing the direction of the speaker section 26B to the upper side of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound is reproduced by the speaker section 26B. The configuration may be such that the light is radiated upward from the front door frame 14 .

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the notification process for normal time, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light. , 23B do not emit light, the power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and for the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, one of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably the display lamp device on the opening side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, It may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification processing. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who is playing a game in the adjacent seat will find the lighting of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B annoying. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat will lose the exhilaration and immersion feeling and lose interest in the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of sound devices (speaker units) provided in the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, a plurality of sound devices notify an abnormality. When the opening of the frame is detected by the abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) and the detection device, one or more of the plurality of sound devices is turned from the first state in which the front of the frame is turned. and a drive means (speaker drive section 26d) for changing to a second state in which the frame body faces away from the front.
That is, when the opening of the frame is detected by the detection device, the orientation of one or more of the plurality of sound devices changes from the first state to the second state, and the player positioned in front of the frame, In other words, the abnormal annunciation sound is not output to the player playing in the adjacent seat. As a result, the possibility that the player will be bothered by the anomaly notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine being played due to an abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine are lost. This reduces the risk of disappointing people.

(2) The pachinko machine 10, when the sound device (speaker units 26A to 26C) is in the second state, creates a guideway that guides the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device in a direction other than the front of the frame. Prepare. For this reason, when the sound device is in the second state, the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device is directed by the guide path in a direction other than the front of the frame, for example, the side (side surface side) or the upper side (upper surface side) of the game machine. ) and is guided downward (bottom side). Therefore, when the frame body of the game machine is opened, the possibility that the player positioned in front of the game machine will be disturbed by the abnormal notification sound is reduced. In addition, since the induced anomaly notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the risk that the hall operator or employees will miss the anomaly notification.

(3) The frame (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the frame (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 has one of the right side and the left side as the support side. It is supported on one of the right side and the left side of the frame 11), and the drive means (speaker section drive section 26d) is arranged on a side different from the support side among the plurality of sound devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C). The orientation of the audio device (speaker section 26A or speaker sections 26B and 26C) is changed. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the anomaly notification sound to the player sitting in the adjacent seat. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine that are being played due to abnormal notifications, and the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine can be suppressed more effectively. This further reduces the risk that the player will be distracted by being caught.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more notification sounds from the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. By making the volume smaller than the volume of the notification sound reproduced by other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the volume reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing in the adjacent seat is not annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I am trying to reduce the fear of thinking. In this embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased stepwise or gradually. A pachinko machine 10 that reduces the possibility that a player playing a game in an adjacent seat will be bothered by an abnormal notification sound will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Connection relationship between DAC and speaker unit provided in sound output LSI>
In this embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually. Unlike the embodiment, the value of the parameter stored in the ROM 412 that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the DAC 403d does not differ between the speaker section 26A and the speaker sections 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters stored in the ROM 412 that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit provided in the DAC 403d are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

FIG. 85 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d provided in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment and the speaker units 26A to 26C.
In the example shown in FIG. 85, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing section into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, different amplifier circuits are not provided for the speaker sections 26A to 26C. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (operational amplifiers) can be reduced, and since there is no need to perform control for each of a plurality of amplifier circuits, the arithmetic processing load of the MPU 402 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the common amplifier circuit 403d2a amplifies the analog signals to be output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the Parameter data defining the reproduction volume of the processing data for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C is not prepared for each of the speaker sections 26A to 26C.

As described above, in this embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually. As a result, the abnormality notification sounds output forward from the speaker units 26A to 26C decrease stepwise or gradually. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player playing a game in the adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormal notification sound. In addition, since it is possible to suppress difficulty in hearing the music and voices output from the pachinko machine 10 being played due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersion caused by the music and voices output from the pachinko machine 10 are lost. This reduces the risk that the player will lose interest in the game.

<Regarding the time change of the playback volume of the speaker>
FIG. 86 is a conceptual diagram of temporal changes in the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. As described above, when the MPU 402 of the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. is controlled to be small. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced at a constant rate (for example, by 1 db) at each predetermined time interval T (for example, 5 sec).

Note that the time interval T for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to 5 seconds and is arbitrary. Since there is a possibility that a player sitting next to the player may feel annoyed by the abnormal notification sound, it is preferable not to make it too long. In addition, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased not at time intervals, but each time an abnormality notification sound (for example, "The door is open!") is reproduced. You may do so.

<Regarding Abnormal Notification Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes abnormality notification processing to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and description of other abnormality notification will be omitted.

In step S4101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S4101 that the command for notifying when the power is restored has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S4105. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4101 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S4102. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores a data table in the program ROM 512 for executing the power recovery notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from various data storage areas in Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the display for notifying when the power is restored based on the command for notifying when the power is restored which is transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S4103, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts to read the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for notifying when power is restored from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 . Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration is performed in a closed (closed) state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 . That is, since the front door frame 14 is not opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat will feel annoyed by the abnormal notification. Therefore, in the power recovery notification program and processing data, there is no process for gradually or gradually decreasing the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C when an abnormality indicating that the door has been opened is notified. do not have.

In step S4104, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S4103 and emitting light. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S4103, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C start announcing an abnormality (for example, outputting a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was off!" and a warning sound). Also, the MPU 402 causes the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data, and light emission data read out in step S4103.

In step S4105, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the normal notification command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S4105 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), it executes the processes after step S4112, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4105 that the normal notification command has been received (YES), it transmits the normal notification command to the display control device 500 in step S4106. In the display control device 500, notification display is performed on the pattern display device 91 based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 stores various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the pattern display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 . Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 .

In step S4107, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program and processing data, light emission data, and sound data for normal notification from the ROM 412 and common ROM 404 . Here, light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S4108, the MPU 402 performs processing for stopping BGM (including music and voice for presentation). In this BGM stop processing, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When stopping the BGM, the MPU 402 causes the RAM 413 to store the address of the data for stopping the reproduction of the BGM in order to restart the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is cancelled. When resuming the reproduction of the BGM when the door open notification is canceled, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts reproducing the BGM from the address, thereby resuming the reproduction from the position where the BGM was stopped. can be done.
When muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so as not to output the sound without stopping the reproduction of the BGM. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

At step S4109, the MPU 402 sets a counter to count the number of times the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the number of times the reproduction volume is decreased in counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 . For example, when "4" is set in the counter, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased in five steps. The value set in this counter is decremented by 1 each time a predetermined time, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 88, elapses. .

As described above, in this embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced stepwise or gradually. For this reason, in the present embodiment, a counter is set in step S4109 to limit the number of times the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is decreased. This prevents the notification from becoming meaningless. Although there is no limit to the value of the counter set in step S4109, it is preferable to set the value so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C does not become too low.

In step S4110, the MPU 402 performs sound data reproduction processing. In the sound data reproduction process of step S4110, the MPU 402 controls the sound volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C so as to decrease stepwise or gradually. Details of the sound data reproduction process in step S4110 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4111, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp section 24 to emit light based on the program, processing data, and light emission data read out in step S4107. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, the light emission data is defined so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are extinguished, so the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S4112, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received a door open notification cancel command for canceling the door open notification transmitted from the MPU 302. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a flag corresponding to the door open notification cancellation command is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 . When the MPU 402 determines in step S4112 that the door open notification cancel command has not been received (NO), it ends the abnormality notification processing without executing the processing after step S4113.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S4112 that it has received the door open notification cancel command (YES), it transmits the door open notification cancel command to the display control device 500 in step S4113. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the pattern display device 91 is canceled based on the received door open notification cancellation command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S4114, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification cancellation command (for example, "The door was opened during power shutdown!" If so, stop the output of the voice such as "The door is open!" and the warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification cancellation command.
Also, in step S4114, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read out and reproduce the voice data "The door is closed!" stored in the common ROM 404. FIG. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "The door is closed!" from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the sound "The door is closed!" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4115, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification cancellation command, in other words, sets the value of the flag to 0. . In step S4116, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S4108. The sound output LSI 403 resumes reproduction of BGM based on an instruction from the MPU 402 . Here, if the BGM was stopped in step S4108, the MPU 402 reads out the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from that address, thereby stopping the BGM. Playback resumes from the position. Also, if the BGM is muted in step S4108, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 terminates the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S4108, the BGM (including music and sound for production) is stopped or muted. A process of lowering the reproduction volume to a predetermined value may be performed immediately. Further, in step S4108, if the volume is decreased gradually or in stages while the BGM is being played without stopping, then in step S4114, the abnormality notification is played back from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The volume is gradually decreased or stepwise decreased until the volume reaches zero or approximately zero, and in step S4116, when the BGM playback is restarted, the BGM playback volume is gradually decreased or stepwise increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the user without causing a sense of incongruity due to the sudden stop of the BGM and the change to a warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of incompatibility due to the change to BGM.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 88, the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is configured to decrease stepwise or gradually as time elapses. . Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 in the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, similarly to the other embodiments, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit open command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit open command has been received (YES), a warning is issued. A configuration (two-stage control) may be employed in which the volume of the sound or the like to be reproduced is reduced. As a result, during time-consuming maintenance or the like, the possibility that a player playing a game in an adjacent seat will be bothered by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. Since the opening of the back pack unit 15 is not due to maintenance or the like, but may be due to fraud, it is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like.

<Regarding Sound Data Playback Processing Executed by Audio Light Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of sound data reproduction processing (processing of step S4110) in FIG.
In step S4201, MPU 402 sets a timer counter to measure the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of RAM 413 to "2500" as a time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of speaker units 26A to 26C. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is 5 seconds. Note that the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to this and is arbitrary. Since there is a possibility that the player sitting down may find the abnormality notification sound annoying, it is preferable not to make it too long.

In step S4202, the MPU 402 starts playing (outputting) the sound data read out in step S4107 of FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data read out in step S4107, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled to output. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C start anomaly notification (for example, output of a voice such as "The door is open!" and a warning sound).

In step S4203, the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the counter value set in step S4109 of FIG. For example, in step S4109 of FIG. 87, if the value of the counter provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set to 4, the MPU 402 sets the value of the counter provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413 to 3. update to.

In step S4204, the MPU 402 determines whether the value of the timer counter set in step S4109 is zero. In step S4204, if the value of the timer counter is not zero (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the sound data reproduction process without performing subsequent processes. In step S4204, if the value of the timer counter is zero (YES), MPU 402 reduces the reproduction volume of speaker units 26A to 26C. More specifically, the MPU 402 reduces the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C by changing the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a (step S4205).

At step S4206, the MPU 402 determines whether the counter value set at step S4109 in FIG. 87 is zero. In step S4206, if the value of the counter is not zero (NO), the MPU 402 terminates the sound data reproduction process without performing subsequent processes. In step S4206, if the counter value is zero (YES), MPU 402 prevents the reproduction volume of speaker units 26A to 26C from becoming any lower. More specifically, the MPU 402 fixes the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a in subsequent processing.

[Another example of the sixth embodiment]
In the above description, the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10 is reduced stepwise or gradually. may be configured to be independently controllable. In other words, like the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. The analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker section 26A, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2b is output to the speaker section 26B. The analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2c may be configured to be output to the speaker section 26C.
In this case, in the audio data reproduction process (process of step S4110 in FIG. 87) described with reference to FIG. The sound volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A is controlled to decrease stepwise or gradually.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the support side as the support side, when opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the front side (player side) is supported with this support side as the rotation axis. ) to open. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, it opens so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player who plays in the seat next to the left. closest to the ear. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the volume output (reproduced) from each of the speaker units 26A to 26C can be independently controlled as described above, Only the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2a for outputting an analog signal to the speaker section 26A is changed every predetermined time period or every predetermined number of times of notification so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker section 26A is reduced stepwise or gradually. should be controlled accordingly.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the supporting side, and the inner frame 13 is supported on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the supporting side. When supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, the door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent right seat. , and the speaker section 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. In this case, the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2b that outputs the analog signal to the speaker units 26B and 26C is changed every predetermined time or every predetermined number of times of notification so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26B is stepped. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to gradually decrease.

In addition, the front door frame 14 is supported on both sides of the inner frame 13 with the right and left sides (hereinafter also referred to as both sides) of the inner frame 13 as supporting sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double-opening structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided, and this detector Based on the detection result in , control may be performed such that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from either the speaker section 26A or the speaker section 26B is reduced stepwise or gradually.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened with the left side as the support side, the door frame 13 is positioned so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the left. As a result, the speaker section 26A comes closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the left. For this reason, control is performed so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A is decreased stepwise or gradually when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified.
Also, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the supporting side, it opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the seat next to the right. , the speaker unit 26B is closest to the ears of the player playing in the adjacent seat on the right. For this reason, when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified, control may be performed so that the reproduction sound volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26B is decreased stepwise or gradually.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the notification process for power recovery and the notification process for normal time, in the normal time notification process, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, , the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light. , 23B do not emit light, the power supply for light emission to the light emitters of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B may be stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and hold different light emission data for the notification process for power restoration and for the notification process for normal time, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened, one of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably the display lamp device on the opening side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14, It may be configured not to emit light. In this case also, the light emission data for the normal time notification process may be defined so that the display lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light. A configuration may be adopted in which the supply of power for light emission to the light emitter of the display lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 is stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the display lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification processing. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who is playing a game in the adjacent seat will find the lighting of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B annoying. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat will lose the exhilaration and immersion feeling and lose interest in the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of sound devices (speaker units) provided in the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) for detecting the opening of the frame, and controlling the plurality of sound devices when the detection device detects the opening of the frame. and an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) for notifying an abnormality. The anomaly notifying means reduces the volume of the plurality of audio devices in a stepwise or gradual manner when announcing an anomaly. That is, although the notification is made at a high volume at first, the volume is reduced step by step or gradually. It is possible to reduce the risk that employees will miss the anomaly notification.

(2) The abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) of the pachinko machine 10 adjusts the volume of one or more of the plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) in a stepwise manner relative to the volume of the other sound devices. Or decrease gradually. That is, when notifying an abnormality, the volume of one or more of the plurality of sound devices is reduced, but the sound volume output from the other sound devices is not reduced. It is possible to reduce the risk that the player loses interest due to the loss of exhilaration and immersion, and more effectively reduce the risk that the hall manager and employees will miss the anomaly report.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by either the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with either the right side or the left side as the supporting side. , the abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) is arranged on the side of a plurality of sound devices (speakers 26A to 26C) different from the support side (speaker 26A or speaker 26B, 26C). The volume is stepwise or gradually decreased (including a mode in which the reproduction volume is set to zero or substantially zero) than the volume of other audio devices (speaker units 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A). Therefore, it is possible to more effectively reduce the annoyance of the anomaly notification sound to the player sitting in the adjacent seat. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voices output from the game machine that are being played due to abnormal notifications, and the exhilaration and immersion that comes from the music and voices output from the game machine can be suppressed more effectively. This further reduces the risk that the player will be distracted by being caught.

[Seventh Embodiment]
2. Description of the Related Art In game halls where game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are installed, BGM is played at a high volume from speakers provided in the game halls. In addition, game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines allow the player to set the volume. there is In this way, the game hall is normally in a state where the sound volume is very loud. On the other hand, there are players who do not like to play games at high volume and play games with the volume setting of the gaming machine low. However, as described above, in the game hall, the sound volume is usually very loud. For this reason, if the volume setting of the gaming machine is reduced, it may be difficult to hear the background music, dialogue, etc. of the gaming machine, and the player may not be able to fully enjoy the presentation of the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, in view of the above-described circumstances, etc., an embodiment of a gaming machine that can favorably enhance the interest of the player will be described. Although the present embodiment will be described below using a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine, the present invention can be applied to various game machines other than pachinko machines, such as slot machines. Further, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those described in the first to sixth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment executes different effects according to the magnitude of the output volume from the speakers 26A to 26C. More specifically, different effects are executed based on the volume settings of the speakers 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Here, the effect includes the effect of outputting voice (dialogue), BGM, and sound effects from the speakers 26A to 26C, which are sound output means (hereinafter also referred to as sound effect), and the display screen of the pattern display device 91, which is the display means. Effects displayed in G (hereinafter also referred to as image effects), lighting/blinking effects of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B as light emitting means (hereinafter also referred to as light emission effects), and the like are included. In addition, although the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not provided, it is possible to add an effect using a movable accessory (hereinafter also referred to as a role effect) or a vibration effect (hereinafter referred to as a vibrating effect) to the above effect. good. Here, the character effect and the vibe effect are included in the effect other than the sound effect.

In the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the operation button 35 can be used to set the output volume of the speakers 26A to 26C. An operation button for setting the output volume of the speakers 26A to 26C may be provided separately from the operation button 35. FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of output volume settings for the speakers 26A to 26C of the pachinko machine 10 is described as five levels, but the number of output volume settings that can be set is not limited to five levels. may be set to two or more stages. In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the output volume settings of the speakers 26A to 26C are set as follows: setting 5>setting 4>setting 3>setting 2>setting 1 (> indicates the magnitude relationship of the volume). It's becoming In other words, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, setting 5 has the highest volume, and setting 1 has the lowest volume. Also, as the volume setting is changed from setting 5 to setting 1, the volume is set to decrease in stages.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect mode and the volume setting of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, different production modes DMA to DMA are set for each of the volume settings 1 to 5 so that different production modes are set according to the settings of the output volumes of the speakers 26A to 26C. DME is associated.
Specifically, the volume setting "1" is associated with the effect mode DMA. Also, the volume setting "2" is associated with the effect mode DMB. Also, the volume setting "3" is associated with the production mode DMC. Also, the volume setting "4" is associated with the effect mode DMD. Also, the volume setting "5" is associated with the effect mode DME. Here, each of the production modes DMA to DME has a sound production, an image production, and a light emission production, respectively. Various productions such as production and hidden suggestion production are performed.

Next, the contents of the effects of each of the effects modes DMA to DME will be explained.
The effect mode DMA (corresponding to the volume setting "1") is a effect mode with more effects (image effect, light emitting effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMB (corresponding to the volume setting "2"). Conversely, the effect mode DMB is a effect mode in which effects other than sound effects (image effects and light emission effects) are less than those in the effect mode DMA.
The production mode DMB (corresponding to the volume setting "2") is a production mode with more productions (image production, light emission production) other than the audio production than the production mode DMC (corresponding to the volume setting "3"). To put it the other way around, the production mode DMC is a production mode with less production (image production, light production) than the production mode DMB other than the audio production.
The production mode DMC (corresponding to the volume setting "3") is a production mode with more productions (image production, light emission production) than the production mode DMD (corresponding to the volume setting "4"). To put it the other way around, the production mode DMD is a production mode in which productions other than the audio production (image production, light emission production) are less than the production mode DMC.
The production mode DMD (corresponding to the volume setting "4") is a production mode with more productions (image production, light emission production) other than the audio production than the production mode DME (corresponding to the volume setting "5"). To put it the other way around, the production mode DME is a production mode in which there are fewer productions (image production, light emission production) other than the audio production than the production mode DMD.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the volume setting is changed from "1" to "5", and the higher the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the more effects other than voice effects (image effects, light emission, etc.) production) is configured to be less. Conversely, the volume setting is changed from "5" to "1", and as the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C decreases, effects other than voice effects (image effects, light emission effects) increase. It is

In addition, if there are many effects other than voice effects (image effects, light-emitting effects), for example, when the volume setting is large (for example, the volume setting is "5" or "4"), 26A ~ 26C only outputs as sound (suggestion effect of latent probability change is performed only by sound effect), but if the volume setting is small (for example, volume setting is "1" to "3"), latent probability change is output. In addition to outputting the suggested lines as voice from the speakers 26A to 26C, the lines suggesting the probability of latent change are displayed as subtitles on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 (the effect of suggesting the probability of latent change is also performed by image production). You may do so. In addition to outputting the words suggesting the potential change of latency as voice from the speakers 26A to 26C, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, which are light-emitting means, emit light by lighting and blinking, the character production by the movable character, and the vibration. You may make it add production|presentation, such as a vibe production|presentation. In addition, the said line is not restricted to what suggests a latent certainty change.
In this way, when the volume setting is low, the player can play the game without worrying about missing the lines output from the speakers 26A to 26C, thereby improving the amusement.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.
The MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 executes timer interrupt processing to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the timer interrupt process of FIG.

(Step S4301)
The MPU 402 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302 , it stores the received command in the RAM 413 . Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302 , and the MPU 402 stores commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 302 . The MPU 402 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 controls performance control including basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result of whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot), information on the number of pending balls in operation, and the fluctuation time of special symbols. A command (type command, variation pattern command or decorative pattern designation command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the sound emission control device 400 receives this. Moreover, MPU302 transmits the production|presentation control command (production stop command) which instruct|indicates production stop after predetermined time (special design fluctuation time) progress, and MPU402 receives this. Furthermore, with respect to the information specifying the game state, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (game state specification command or jackpot command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the game state transition occurs). and the MPU 402 receives it. As a result, the MPU 402, in other words, the sound emission control device 400 side can grasp the current game state.

(Step S4302)
The MPU 402 executes volume setting processing. Specifically, the MPU 402 executes a process of controlling the volume output from the speaker units 26A to 26C to the received volume setting when the volume setting is performed by the operation button 35 as the operation means. As a result, the volume output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is controlled to the volume set by the player. Details of the volume setting process will be described later.

(Step S4303)
MPU402 performs production mode determination processing based on the volume setting in step S4302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines in which of the production modes DMA to DME the production is to be executed, based on the volume setting in step S4302. Details of the effect mode determination process will be described later.

(Step S4304)
The MPU 402 executes effect determination processing based on commands received from the MPU 302 of the main controller 300 . Specifically, based on the command received from MPU 302, MPU 402 executes various effects such as ready-to-win effect, advance notice effect, look-ahead effect, and lurking suggestion effect corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S4303.

(Step S4305)
The MPU 402 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the command received from the MPU 302 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. .

(Step S4306)
The MPU 402 executes light emission control processing for light emission control of the display lamp devices 23A, 23B and the first to third reservation lamp sections 95a to 96. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 executes the light emitting effect corresponding to the command transmitted from the main controller 300 based on the results of the effect mode determination process in step S4303 and the effect determination process in step S4304.

(Step S4307)
The MPU 402 executes audio control processing for outputting sounds from the speaker units 26A-26C. Specifically, the MPU 402, based on the result of the effect mode determination process in step S4303 and the effect determination process in step S4304, the sound effect (BGM, voice (dialogue)) corresponding to the command transmitted from the main control device 300 , output of sound effects, etc.).

(Step S4308)
The MPU 402 executes image control processing for displaying an effect image on the display screen G. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command for executing an image effect to the display control device 500 based on the result of the effect mode determination process in step S4303 and the effect determination process in step S4304. The display control device 500 displays an effect image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 91 based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 400 .

(Step S4309)
The MPU 402, based on the contents of the notification process for power recovery (step S416) of the main process (see FIG. 24) and the normal notification process (step S1303) of the front door frame open monitoring process (FIG. 33), Perform notification processing. Since the details of the abnormality notification process have already been described, redundant description will be omitted.

(Step S4310)
The MPU 402 executes result display processing. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is executed when the high-frequency support mode (time saving) ends without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the variable probability state. Since the details of the result display process have already been described, redundant description will be omitted.

(Step S4311)
The MPU 402 executes a suggestion rendering process. Specifically, the MPU 402, based on the results of the effect mode determination process in step S4303 and the effect determination process in step S4304, a predetermined suggestive effect (effect suggesting the possibility that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a definite variable state). Execute at the timing of Since the timing of executing the suggestive rendering process has already been described, redundant description will be omitted. After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding Volume Setting Processing Executed by Audio Light Emission Control Device 400>
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the volume setting process (step S4302 in FIG. 90) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.

(Step S4401)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation buttons 35 as operation means has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is accepted (YES), the process of step S4402 is executed. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the volume setting process.

(Step S4402)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the left button 35b of the operation buttons 35 has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the left button 35b has been pressed (YES), it executes the process of step S4403. When the MPU 402 determines that the left direction button 35b is not pressed (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S4405.

(Step S4403)
The MPU 402 determines whether the volume setting is "1" (minimum). Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (minimum). When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (minimum) (YES), it ends the volume setting process. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "1" (minimum) (NO), it executes the process of step S4404.

(Step S4404)
The MPU 402 reduces the volume setting by one. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets "4" if the volume setting is "5", sets "3" if the volume setting is "4", sets "2" if the volume setting is "3", If the volume setting is "2", it is set to "1".

(Step S4405)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the right button 35c of the operation buttons 35 has been pressed. When the MPU 402 determines that the right button 35c has been pressed (YES), it executes the process of step S4406. If the MPU 402 determines that the right direction button 35c is not pressed (NO), it ends the volume setting process.

(Step S4406)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "5" (maximum). Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "5" (maximum). When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 413 corresponds to "5" (maximum) (YES), it ends the volume setting process. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "5" (maximum) (NO), it executes the process of step S4407.

(Step S4407)
The MPU 402 increments the volume setting by one. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets "2" if the volume setting is "1", sets "3" if the volume setting is "2", sets "4" if the volume setting is "3", If the volume setting is "4", then "5".

(Step S4408)
The MPU 402 sets the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the volume set in step S4404 or step S4407. Specifically, the MPU 402 changes (rewrites) the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 to correspond to the volume setting in step S4404 or step S4407. As a result, the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes the volume set by the player.

In the above description, the left and right direction buttons 35b and 35c of the operation button 35 are used to set the volume, but an operation button for setting the volume may be provided separately from the operation button 35. In the above description, pressing the left button 35b of the operation button 35 decreases the volume setting by one step, and pressing the right button 35c of the operation button 35 increases the volume setting by one step. The volume setting may be increased by one step when the left button 35b of the operation button 35 is pressed, and the volume setting may be decreased by one step when the right button 35c of the operation button 35 is pressed.

<Regarding production mode determination processing executed by sound emission control device 400>
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect mode determination process (step S4303 in FIG. 90) of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.

(Step S4501)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "1". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (YES), it executes the process of step S4502. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "1" (NO), it executes the process of step S4503.

(Step S4502)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMA corresponding to the volume setting flag "1".

(Step S4503)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "2". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "2". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "2" (YES), it executes the process of step S4504. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "2" (NO), it executes the process of step S4505.

(Step S4504)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMB corresponding to the volume setting flag "2".

(Step S4505)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "3". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "3". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "3" (YES), it executes the process of step S4506. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "3" (NO), it executes the process of step S4507.

(Step S4506)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMC corresponding to the volume setting flag "3".

(Step S4507)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "4". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "4". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 413 corresponds to "4" (YES), it executes the process of step S4508. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "4" (NO), it executes the process of step S4509.

(Step S4508)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DMD corresponding to the volume setting flag "4".

(Step S4509)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to be the effect mode DME corresponding to the volume setting flag "5".

(Step S4510)
MPU402 sets production mode to the mode set by step S4502, S4504, S4506, S4508 or S4509. Specifically, the MPU 402 changes (rewrites) the effect mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 to those corresponding to the effect mode determined in steps S4502, S4504, S4506, S4508 or S4509. As a result, the presentation mode of the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the set sound volume.

[Another example of the seventh embodiment]
In the seventh embodiment, different effects (production modes DMA to DME) are executed according to the magnitude of the output volume from the speakers 26A to 26C, that is, the volume setting. ~DME may be configured to be selectable by the player. In this case, regardless of the magnitude of the output volume from the speakers 26A-26C, that is, regardless of the volume setting, the player can select the performance modes DMA-DME, so the player's options increase. As a result, the player's sufficiency and satisfaction with the pachinko machine 10 are improved.

In addition, the game machine 10 is provided with a sound collector (for example, a microphone), and the volume differs according to the difference between the ambient sound volume of the gaming hall collected by the sound collector (for example, a microphone) and the set sound volume of the pachinko machine 10. You may comprise so that production may be performed. More specifically, according to the difference Vβ-Vα (db) between the ambient environment volume Vα (db) of the gaming hall collected by the sound collecting device of the gaming machine 10 and the set volume Vβ (db) of the pachinko machine 10 , any one of the presentation modes DMA to DME may be executed. In this case, the greater the volume difference Vβ−Vα (db), the more effect modes (for example, effect modes DMA, DMB, etc.) with more effects (image effects, light-emitting effects) other than sound effects are executed. If the volume difference Vβ-Vα (db) is negative, it means that the set volume Vβ is larger than the surrounding environment volume Vα. Therefore, if the volume difference Vβ-Vα (db) is negative, Execute the production mode DME.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes effect execution means (MPU 402) for executing effects, sound output means (speakers 26A to 26C) for outputting sounds based on the effects executed by the effect execution means, and sound A volume setting reception unit (operation button 35, MPU 402) that receives the setting of the output volume of the output means, and a volume adjustment means (MPU 402) that adjusts the volume of the sound output means based on the setting received by the volume setting reception unit. and an effect control means (MPU 402) that causes the effect execution means to execute different effects based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving part. According to such a pachinko machine 10, the effect executing means is caused to execute different effects based on the setting of the output sound volume, so that different effects can be enjoyed by setting the output sound volume. As a result, interest is improved.

(2) The pachinko machine 10 has a first effect and a second effect in which the effect by the sound output means is relatively less than the first effect. Then, the effect control means causes the effect executing means to switch between the first effect and the second effect based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving section. According to such a pachinko machine 10, based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving unit, the first effect is relatively large in the effect by the sound output means, and the second effect is relatively small in the effect by the sound output means. Since the performance is switched and executed, it is possible to enjoy performances with different ratios of performances by sound, and the amusement is improved.

(3) The effect control means of the pachinko machine 10 causes the effect executing means to execute the first effect when the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. According to such a pachinko machine 10, when the setting of the output sound volume is equal to or higher than the predetermined value, the first effect with the relatively large effect by the sound output means is executed. A player can easily hear the sound even in a noisy situation. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance by the sound even if the ratio of the performance by the sound is increased. Also, players who increase the output sound volume are thought to want to enjoy sound effects, and increasing the ratio of sound effects also matches the player's taste. As a result, interest is improved.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Combinations of features such as modifications, improvements, etc. within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group. For example, in each of the above embodiments, the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier, is changed by the parameters stored in the ROM 412, but the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E is changed by setting the volume. It may be configured to allow

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1.
The game machine according to feature A1 is
a game board having a game area on which game balls roll;
a jackpot lottery means for performing a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area;
A game state control means for controlling, as game states, a variable probability state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous and a normal state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is lower than the variable probability state, according to the result of the game. and,
In a latent probability variable state in which the game state is in the probability variable state but the fact is not notified to the player, performance control for executing, at a predetermined timing, a performance suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state. comprising means and
The game state control means is
After the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is shifted to a specific game state (shorter working hours) in which the variation time of the decorative symbols is shorter than usual until the number of times of variation of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined number of times. characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to feature A1, even though the game state is in the variable probability state, in the latent variable probability state in which the player is not notified to that effect, an effect that suggests the possibility of the variable latent probability state is provided. Since the player is provided with the effect control means which is executed at a predetermined timing, the player can know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state by the effect. For this reason, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation and heighten the sense of anticipation for the next big win, even though the state of the variable probability state is not explicitly indicated and hidden. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is bored from quitting the game because the player's sense of expectation for the big win cannot be sustained despite the variable probability state. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to feature A2 is the gaming machine according to feature A1,
The production control means is
Before the number of times of variation in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to feature A2, before the number of times of variation in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variation state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game until the specific game state (reduction of working hours) after the end of the big win game state with heightening the expectation of the player for the next big win. In addition, since the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent variable probability state is relatively short, the period during which the player feels stress without knowing whether it is the variable probability state is short. The effect of making the player continue the game is high. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to feature A3 is the gaming machine according to feature A1,
The production control means is
After the number of times of variation in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to feature A3, after the number of times of variation in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variation state is executed. Therefore, the game can be continued with the player's expectation for the next big win increased until the specific game state (time saving) after the big win game state ends. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to feature A4 is the gaming machine according to feature A3,
The production control means is
After the number of fluctuations in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired in the specific game state is executed, and during the effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired or the game acquired It is characterized in that an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed after the effect of presenting the number of balls.

According to the gaming machine according to feature A4, after the number of times of variation in the specific game state reaches the prescribed number, the player hides during the presentation of the number of game balls acquired in the specific game state or after the presentation of the number of game balls acquired in the specific game state. Execute a production that suggests the possibility of being in a definite variable state. For this reason, the specific game state (time saving) after the end of the jackpot game state ends, and the player's next It is possible to continue the game while increasing expectations for the big win. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to feature A5 is the gaming machine according to feature A1,
The production control means is
When the jackpot game is won by the jackpot lottery means before the number of fluctuations in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect is executed in the jackpot game to suggest the possibility of the latent probability variable state. characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to feature A5, when the jackpot game is won by the jackpot lottery means before the number of fluctuations reaches the prescribed number, the jackpot game executes an effect suggesting the possibility of a latent probability variable state. . For this reason, even if the jackpot game is won before the specific game state (time saving) ends after the jackpot game state ends, the player will not be able to win the jackpot game in the variable probability state or the jackpot game in the normal state. You can find out if you have been selected. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to feature A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
An operation receiving means for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The production control means is
When an operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, an effect suggesting the possibility of being in the variable latent probability state is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to feature A6, the operation receiving means for receiving the player's operation is provided, and when the operation is received by the operation receiving means, the effect indicating the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to actively intervene.

The gaming machine according to feature A7 is the gaming machine according to feature A6,
The production control means is
When a predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means, an effect suggesting the possibility of being in the variable latent probability state is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to feature A7, when a predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means, an effect suggesting the possibility of being in the latent probability variable state is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy searching for what kind of operation is used to execute the effect suggesting the possibility of the variable latent state, which improves the amusement. Also, it is possible to prompt the player to more actively intervene.

A gaming machine according to feature A8 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7,
The production control means is
The effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed by any one or a combination of sound, light emission, image and movable accessory.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to feature A8, the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent variable state is executed by any one or a combination of sound, light emission, image and movable accessory. For this reason, depending on the timing of executing the production that suggests the possibility of a potential latent state and the game state, it may be a sound-only production, a light-only production, or a combination of sound, light emission, video, etc. The player can enjoy various performances such as playing, and the interest is improved.

A gaming machine according to feature A9 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8,
An effect execution timing lottery means for performing a lottery for the timing of executing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state,
The production control means is
According to the lottery result of the effect execution timing lottery means, an effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state is executed.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to feature A9, it is provided with a performance execution timing lottery means for performing a lottery for the timing of executing a performance suggesting the possibility of the latent probability variable state, and according to the lottery result of the performance execution timing lottery means, Executes a production that suggests the possibility of being in a latent definite variable state. Therefore, the player can enjoy predicting when the effect suggesting the possibility of the variable latency state will be executed. In addition, you can enjoy a thrilling feeling when the production that suggests the possibility of the latent probability change state will be executed.

A gaming machine according to feature A10 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9,
The game machine is
A first big win game state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is an advantageous probability variable state and a specific game state to which the first big win game state and after the big win game end are the same in the number of fluctuations and performances, and in which the big win is the same. It is characterized by having a second jackpot game state in which the lottery probability of the lottery means is a normal state lower than the variable probability state.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to feature A10, the first jackpot game state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is an advantageous probability variable state, and the number of fluctuations in the first jackpot game state and the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game ends. and a second big win game state in which the performance is the same and the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is a normal state lower than the variable probability state. It is difficult to distinguish between the first jackpot state and the second jackpot state because the number of times of variation and the performance in the specific game state to be shifted to after that are the same, but in the present invention, the possibility of the latent probability change state is considered. Since the suggested performance is executed at a predetermined timing, the player can know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state by the performance, and can accurately grasp the transition of the game state. can be done.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, the possibility of the latent variable probability state is suggested in the latent variable probability state in which the game state is in the variable probability state but the game player is not notified of that fact. Since the production is executed at a predetermined timing, the following problems can be solved.

In conventional gaming machines, since the latent probability variable state is not reported, the player cannot know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state. For this reason, the player played the game with frustration. In such a case, the player's expectation for the big win could not be sustained despite the variable probability state, and the player who got bored sometimes stopped playing the game. In addition, it was not possible to accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1.
The game machine according to feature B1 is
a game board having a game area on which game balls roll;
a jackpot lottery means for performing a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area;
A game state control means for controlling, as game states, a variable probability state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous and a normal state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is lower than the variable probability state, according to the result of the game. and,
Fall lottery means for performing a fall lottery in which the variable probability state is the normal state every time the jackpot lottery is performed;
an effect control means for executing an effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery at a predetermined timing;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine pertaining to feature B1, in the gaming machine comprising the drop lottery means for performing the drop lottery in which the variable probability state is the normal state, an effect suggesting the result of the drop lottery is executed at a predetermined timing. can know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state by the effect. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a player who is bored from quitting the game because the player's expectation for the big win cannot be maintained despite the variable probability state. Also, when the player falls to the normal state, the player can recognize that the player is in the normal state. Thus, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to feature B2 is the gaming machine according to feature B1,
The production control means is
A performance suggesting the result of the fall lottery is executed when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won.

According to the game machine according to feature B2, when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won, the performance suggesting the result of the fall lottery is executed. Therefore, the player can immediately know that he/she has fallen. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not to continue the game after winning the drop lottery even though the lottery probability is not in an advantageous variable probability state. In addition, since the player can immediately know that he or she has fallen, the player can suppress wasteful consumption of game balls when not continuing the game. In addition, when continuing the game, the player can continue the game after knowing that the lottery probability is not an advantageous variable probability state, but can continue the game, which is highly satisfying.

The gaming machine according to feature B3 is the gaming machine according to feature B2,
The production control means is
After the number of fluctuations in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired in the specific game state is executed, and during the effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired or the game acquired It is characterized in that an effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery is executed after the effect of presenting the number of balls.

According to the gaming machine according to feature B3, after the number of fluctuations in the specific game state reaches the prescribed number, the player falls during the presentation of the number of game balls obtained in the specific game state or after the presentation of the number of game balls obtained. An effect suggesting the result of the lottery is executed. For this reason, the specific game state (time saving) after the end of the jackpot game state ends, and the player's next It is possible to continue the game while increasing expectations for the big win. Also, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to characteristic B4 is the gaming machine according to characteristic B1,
The game state control means is
After the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is shifted to a specific game state in which the variation time of the decorative symbols is shorter than usual until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined number of times,
The production control means is
When the jackpot game is won by the jackpot lottery means before the number of fluctuations in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect suggesting the result of the drop lottery is executed in the jackpot game. do.

According to the game machine pertaining to feature B4, when a big win game is won by a big win lottery means before the number of times of variation reaches a specified number of times, an effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery is executed in the big win game. For this reason, even if the jackpot game is won before the specific game state (time saving) ends after the jackpot game state ends, the player will not be able to win the jackpot game in the variable probability state or the jackpot game in the normal state. You can find out if you have been selected. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

A gaming machine according to feature B5 is a gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4,
The production control means is
It is characterized by suggesting the number of fluctuations when falling from a high-probability state to a normal state by the falling lottery means.

According to the gaming machine according to feature B5, the effect control means suggests the number of fluctuations when falling from the high probability state to the normal state by the falling lottery means. Therefore, the player can accurately know when the high-probability state has fallen to the low-probability state, and can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

The gaming machine according to feature B6 is the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
An operation receiving means for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The production control means is
When an operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, an effect suggesting a result of the falling lottery is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to feature B6, the operation receiving means for receiving the player's operation is provided, and when the operation is received by the operation receiving means, an effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to actively intervene.

The gaming machine according to characteristic B7 is the gaming machine according to characteristic B6,
The production control means is
When a predetermined operation is accepted by the operation accepting means, an effect suggesting a result of the falling lottery is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to feature B7, when a predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means, an effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy searching for what kind of operation is used to execute the effect suggesting the possibility of the variable latent state, which improves the amusement. In addition, it is possible to prompt the player to more actively intervene.

A gaming machine according to feature B8 is a gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7,
The production control means is
The effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery is executed by any one of sound, light emission, image and movable accessory, or a combination thereof.

According to the gaming machine according to feature B8, the effect suggesting the result of the drop lottery is executed by any one or a combination of sound, light emission, image and movable accessory. For this reason, depending on the timing of executing the effect that suggests the result of the fall lottery and the game state, it will be a sound-only effect, a light-only effect, or a combination of sound, light, video, etc. A player can enjoy various performances, and the amusement is improved.

A gaming machine according to feature B9 is a gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8,
An effect execution timing lottery means for performing a lottery for the timing of executing the effect suggesting the result of the fall lottery,
The production control means is
An effect suggesting the result of the fall lottery is executed according to the lottery result of the effect execution timing lottery means.

According to the game machine pertaining to feature B9, the performance execution timing lottery means for performing a lottery for the timing of executing a performance suggesting the result of the drop lottery is provided, and the fall lottery is determined according to the lottery result of the performance execution timing lottery means. Execute a production that suggests the result. Therefore, the player can enjoy predicting when the effect suggesting the result of the fall lottery will be executed. In addition, you can feel the thrill of knowing when the effect suggesting the result of the falling lottery will be executed.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, even though the game state has fallen from the variable probability state to the normal state, the result of the falling lottery is suggested in a state in which the player is not notified to that effect. Since the effect to be performed is executed at a predetermined timing, the following problems can be solved.

In the conventional falling lottery type game machine, the result of the falling lottery is not notified, so the player cannot know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state. For this reason, the player played the game with frustration. In such a case, the player's expectation for the big win could not be sustained despite the variable probability state, and the player who got bored sometimes stopped playing the game. In addition, it was not possible to accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1.
The gaming machine according to feature C1 is
a game board having a game area on which game balls roll;
a jackpot lottery means for performing a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area;
A game state control means for controlling, as game states, a variable probability state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous and a normal state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is lower than the variable probability state, according to the result of the game. and,
An effect control means for executing, at a predetermined timing, an effect suggesting whether the game state before shifting to the big win game state was the variable probability state or the normal state as a result of the lottery by the big win lottery means;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine according to feature C1, the player is provided with an effect (hereinafter referred to as suggestion production) is executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the player can accurately grasp the game state. As a result, the player can easily decide whether to continue or stop playing the game.

The gaming machine according to feature C2 is the gaming machine according to feature C1,
The production control means is
The performance is executed at a predetermined timing in the big win game state.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature C2, as a result of the lottery by the big-hit lottery means, when the game state shifts to the big-hit game state, an effect is executed at a predetermined timing of the big-hit game state. Therefore, the player can know during the jackpot game state whether the jackpot game is won in the variable probability state or the normal state. In addition, the player does not usually stop the game during the big win game, and in the present invention, the suggestion performance is executed at a predetermined timing in the big win game state, so that the player is strongly motivated to continue the game. It is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game immediately after the suggestive effect is performed. In addition, since the suggestive effect is executed during the jackpot game state, the suggestive effect can be executed at the timing that the player really wants to know.

The gaming machine according to feature C3 is the gaming machine according to feature C2,
The production control means is
In the jackpot gaming state, the effect is executed when a predetermined number of rounds is reached.

According to the gaming machine according to feature C3,
In the jackpot game state, when a predetermined number of rounds is reached, a suggestive effect is executed. In other words, the suggesting effect is not executed immediately in the jackpot gaming state, but the suggesting effect is executed after reaching the predetermined number of rounds, so the player can either win the jackpot in the variable probability state or the normal state until then. The player will have to think about whether it is a big win or not, so that the player can enjoy thinking about it, and the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.

The gaming machine according to feature C4 is the gaming machine according to feature C3,
Equipped with production execution timing lottery means for performing lottery for the round in which the production is executed,
The production control means is
The performance is executed according to the lottery result of the performance execution timing lottery means.

According to the game machine pertaining to the feature C4, a performance execution timing lottery means for performing a lottery as to which round the suggestive performance is to be executed is provided, and the suggestive performance is executed according to the lottery result of the performance execution timing lottery means. Therefore, the player can enjoy predicting when the suggestive effect will be executed. In addition, it is possible to feel the thrill of knowing when the suggestive effect will be executed.

A gaming machine according to feature C5 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4,
An operation receiving means for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The production control means is
The performance is executed when the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to feature C5, the operation receiving means for receiving the player's operation is provided, and when the operation is received by the operation receiving means, the suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to actively intervene.

The gaming machine according to feature C6 is the gaming machine according to feature C5,
The production control means is
The effect is executed when a predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means.

According to the gaming machine according to feature C6, the suggestive effect is executed when the predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means. Therefore, the player can enjoy exploring how the suggestive effect is executed by what kind of operation, and the amusement is improved. In addition, it is possible to prompt the player to more actively intervene.

A gaming machine according to feature C7 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
The production control means is
The production is performed by one or a combination of sound, light emission, video, and movable accessories.

According to the gaming machine according to feature C7, the suggestive effect is executed by any one or a combination of sound, light emission, image and movable accessory. Therefore, depending on the timing of execution of the suggestive effect and the game state, the player can perform various effects such as a sound-only effect, a light-only effect, or a combination of sound, light emission, video, etc. You can enjoy and improve your interest.

A gaming machine according to feature C8 is a gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7,
The game machine is
A first big win game state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is an advantageous probability variable state and a specific game state to which the first big win game state and after the big win game end are the same in the number of fluctuations and performances, and in which the big win is the same. It is characterized by having a second jackpot game state in which the lottery probability of the lottery means is a normal state lower than the variable probability state.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature C8, the first jackpot game state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is an advantageous variable state, and the number of fluctuations in the first jackpot game state and the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game ends. and a second big win game state in which the performance is the same and the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is a normal state lower than the variable probability state. It is difficult to distinguish between the first jackpot state and the second jackpot state because the number of times of variation and the performance in the specific game state to be shifted to after that are the same. Since it is executed, the player can know whether the game state is an advantageous probability variable state or a normal state by the effect, and can accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, as a result of the lottery by the jackpot lottery means, an effect indicating whether the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state was either the probability variable state or the normal state is performed at a predetermined timing. By doing so, you can solve the following problems:

As a result of the lottery by the jackpot lottery means, when the player shifts to the jackpot game state, I wanted to know whether the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state was the variable probability state or the normal state, and I played the game with frustration. Also, the player could not accurately grasp the transition of the game state.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
The gaming machine according to feature D1 is
production execution means for executing production;
sound output means for outputting sound based on the performance executed by the performance execution means;
a volume setting reception unit that receives settings for the output volume of the sound output means;
volume adjustment means for adjusting the volume of the sound output means based on the setting accepted by the volume setting acceptance section;
Production control means for causing the production execution means to execute different productions based on the settings accepted by the volume setting reception unit;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine according to feature D1, the effect executing means is caused to execute different effects based on the setting of the output sound volume, so that different effects can be enjoyed depending on the setting of the output sound volume. As a result, interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D2 is the gaming machine according to feature D1,
The game machine is
Having a first effect and a second effect in which the effect by the sound output means is relatively less than the first effect,
The production control means is
Based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving section, the effect executing means is caused to switch between the first effect and the second effect.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature D2, based on the settings accepted by the volume setting acceptance unit, the first effect is relatively large in the effect by the sound output means, and the second effect is relatively small in effect by the sound output means. Execution is performed by switching between performances. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy effects with different ratios of sound effects, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine according to feature D3 is the gaming machine according to feature D2,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the effect executing means is caused to execute the first effect.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D3, when the setting of the output sound volume is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the first effect, in which the effect by the sound output means is relatively large, is executed. When the output volume is high, the player can easily hear the sound even in a noisy environment. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance by the sound even if the ratio of the performance by the sound is increased. Also, players who increase the output sound volume are thought to want to enjoy sound effects, and increasing the ratio of sound effects also matches the player's taste. As a result, interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D4 is the gaming machine according to feature D2 or feature D3,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is less than a predetermined value, the effect executing means is caused to execute the second effect.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D4, when the setting of the output sound volume is less than the predetermined value, the second effect, in which the effect by the sound output means is relatively small, is executed. When the output volume is low, it is difficult for the player to hear the sound if the surroundings are noisy. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player cannot enjoy the sound effects even if the ratio of the sound effects is increased. In addition, it is thought that players who reduce the output volume want to enjoy other effects (for example, effects using images, light emission, and tactile sensations) rather than sound effects. It also matches the taste of the player. As a result, interest is improved.

A gaming machine according to feature D5 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
The game machine is
a third effect, and a fourth effect in which the effect by means other than the sound output means is relatively more than the third effect,
The production control means is
Based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving section, the effect execution means is caused to switch between the third effect and the fourth effect.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature D5, based on the settings accepted by the volume setting accepting unit, the third effect in which the effect by the other effect means is relatively small, and the effect by the other effect means is relatively large. The fourth performance is switched to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the effects other than the sound with different proportions of the effects, which improves the interest.

The gaming machine according to feature D6 is the gaming machine according to feature D5,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the other effect means is caused to execute the third effect.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D6, when the setting of the output sound volume is less than the predetermined value, the third effect, in which the effect by the other effect means is relatively small, is executed. A player who increases the output sound volume is considered to want to enjoy an effect by sound, and reducing the proportion of the effect other than sound matches the player's preference. As a result, interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D7 is the gaming machine according to feature D5 or feature D6,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is less than a predetermined value, the other effect means is caused to execute the fourth effect.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D7, when the setting of the output sound volume is less than the predetermined value, the fourth effect, in which the effect by the other effect means is relatively large, is executed. When the output volume is low, it is difficult for the player to hear the sound if the surroundings are noisy. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance by increasing the ratio of the performance other than the sound. In addition, it is thought that players who reduce the output volume want to enjoy other effects (for example, effects using images, light emission, and tactile sensations) rather than sound effects, so the ratio of non-sound effects should be increased. also matches the player's taste. As a result, interest is improved.

A gaming machine according to feature D8 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D5 to D7,
The other effect means is display means for displaying effect images based on the effect executed by the effect execution means,
The game machine is
Having a fifth effect and a sixth effect in which the effect by the display means is relatively more than the fifth effect,
The production control means is
Based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving section, the effect execution means is caused to switch between the fifth effect and the sixth effect.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D8, based on the setting accepted by the volume setting acceptance unit, the third effect is relatively less effect by the display means, and the fourth effect is relatively more effect by the display means. switch and execute. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy effects with different proportions of image effects, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D9 is the gaming machine according to feature D8,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the display means is caused to execute the fifth effect.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D9, when the setting of the output sound volume is less than the predetermined value, the fifth effect in which the effect by the display means is relatively small is executed. A player who increases the output sound volume is considered to want to enjoy the sound effect, and reducing the ratio of the image effect also suits the player's preference. As a result, interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D10 is the gaming machine according to feature D8 or feature D9,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is less than a predetermined value, the display means is caused to execute the sixth effect.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature D10, when the setting of the output sound volume is less than the predetermined value, the sixth effect, in which the effect by the display means is relatively large, is executed. When the output volume is low, it is difficult for the player to hear the sound if the surroundings are noisy. Therefore, by increasing the proportion of image effects, the player can enjoy the effects. In addition, it is considered that the player who reduces the output sound volume prefers the image presentation rather than the sound presentation, and increasing the ratio of the image presentation also suits the player's preference. As a result, interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D11 is a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10,
a game board having a game area on which game balls roll;
a jackpot lottery means for performing a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area;
A game state control means for controlling, as game states, a variable probability state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous and a normal state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is lower than the variable probability state, according to the result of the game. and,
with
The production control means is
Based on the setting received by the sound volume setting receiving section, the effect executing means is caused to execute a suggestion as to whether the game state is the variable probability state or the normal state with different effects.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to feature D11, based on the setting accepted by the volume setting accepting section, the indication as to whether the game state is the variable probability state or the normal state is executed with different effects. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy different suggestive effects depending on the setting of the output sound volume.

The gaming machine according to feature D12 is the gaming machine according to feature D11,
The game machine is
having a first suggestion for executing the suggestion by a sound effect and a second suggestion for executing the suggestion by a effect other than the sound effect;
The production control means is
It is characterized in that, based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving section, the effect executing means is caused to switch between the first suggestion and the second suggestion.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature D12, the first suggestion and the second suggestion are switched and executed based on the setting accepted by the volume setting accepting section. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy various suggestion effects by setting the volume, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D13 is the gaming machine according to feature D12,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the effect executing means is caused to execute the first suggestion.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D13, when the setting of the output sound volume is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the effect executing means is caused to execute the first suggestion. When the output volume is high, the player can easily hear the sound even in a noisy environment. Therefore, the player can hear even if the suggestive effect by sound is performed, and can enjoy the suggestive effect by sound. In addition, it is considered that the player who increases the output sound volume wants to enjoy the performance by the sound, and executing the suggestive performance by the sound is also suitable for the player's preference. As a result, interest is improved.

The gaming machine according to feature D14 is the gaming machine according to feature D12 or feature D13,
The production control means is
When the setting of the output sound volume received by the sound volume setting receiving section is less than a predetermined value, the effect executing means is caused to execute the second suggestion.

According to the gaming machine according to feature D14, when the setting of the output sound volume is less than the predetermined value, the effect executing means is caused to execute the second suggestion. When the output volume is low, it is difficult for the player to hear the sound if the surroundings are noisy. For this reason, the player cannot hear even if the suggestion effect by the sound is executed, and it is conceivable that the player feels stress. In addition, players who reduce the output volume are considered to want to enjoy other effects (for example, effects using images, light emission, and tactile sensations) rather than sound effects, so suggestive effects other than sound are executed. also matches the player's taste. As a result, interest is improved.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, the effect executing means is caused to execute different effects based on the setting of the output sound volume, so the following problems can be solved.

In the game hall, the sound volume is usually very loud. Therefore, depending on the volume setting of the gaming machine, the player may not be able to fully enjoy the effects of the gaming machine.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably applied to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine (game machine) 11... Outer frame 12... Game machine main body 13... Inner frame 14... Front door frame 21... Window part 22... Window panel 23... Indicator lamp device 24... Error Indicator lamp portion 26A to 26E Speaker portion 30 Cover member driving portion 31 Upper bulging portion 32 Lower bulging portion 33 Upper plate 34 Lower plate 35 Operation button 41 Firing handle 81 Game board 82 General winning opening (10 prize balls) 83 Variable winning device 85 Thru gate 86 Variable display unit 87 Out opening 88 Rotation guide member 89 Game nail 91 Symbol display device 250 First monitoring device 290 Second monitoring device 300 Main control device 400 Sound emission control device 500 Display control device

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area on which game balls roll;
a jackpot lottery means for performing a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area;
A game state control means for controlling, as game states, a variable probability state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is advantageous and a normal state in which the lottery probability of the big win lottery means is lower than the variable probability state, according to the result of the game. and,
Fall lottery means for performing a fall lottery in which the variable probability state is the normal state every time the jackpot lottery is performed;
an effect control means for executing, at a predetermined timing, an effect suggesting the result of the fall lottery when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won,
The game state control means is
After the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is shifted to a specific game state in which the variation time of the decorative symbols is shorter than usual until the number of variations of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined number of times,
The production control means is
After the number of fluctuations in the specific game state reaches the specified number of times, an effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired in the specific game state is executed, and during the effect of presenting the number of game balls acquired, the fall lottery is performed. A gaming machine characterized by executing a performance suggesting a result.

Images